Home

Yamaha DRX-730BL Owner's Manual

1. DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT apu ww smic o 2 0 OTRO MONITOR pM REGISTRATION MEMORY AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT JL A B 1 222 3 4 FREEZE PSR 730 MULTI PAD PHONES Y PSR 630 he t Gio tv e Bho whe Ege whe en e eos e ine Ge ae Ee re e core Ebo o v 2 Ee tio o Gate dite Oe e i ane Boe e ye wae Bae wae Do p Boe YAMAHA 3 sme PANEL VOICE xa voic
2. page 18 PITCH BEND Wheel page 54 MODULATION Wheel PSR 730 page 55 PHONES 13 Disk page 64 E Rear Panel Controls FOOT VOL page 13 TO HOST page 121 HOST SELECT Switch page 122 MIDI IN and OUT Connectors page 121 SUSTAIN Jack page 13 9 AUX OUT R L L R page 13 DC IN 10 12V Jack page 12 The Music Stand The PSR 730 630 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel Basic Display Operation The PSR 730 630 LCD panel is a large multi function type that simultaneously displays and provides access to a number of important parameters Basic operation of the display as well as the MENU and SUB MENU buttons and the meaning of the icons which appear in the display are summarized briefly below The Display Icons Style Song Number r1 Voice Number R1 Voice E00 710 I The style number or song number is dis 1111 The currently selected R1 voice num LI LI played here when in the Song Style Mode eu e ber page 17 appears here Disk
3. Measure selection Multi record 92 Q Ir E User song 4 Ride E 96 ru Track clear tr enne 94 p M TTE eter eet ee Chorus depth setting Song edit 97 PU DSP depth setting Song edit 97 Octave setting Song edit 97 PSR 730 630 Display MENU SUB MENU Structure MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE REGISTRATION 11 Bank nate ete Registration bank selection 57 Shortcut gt REGISTRATION MEMORY Button 11 Multi Pad set Multi pad set selection 61 Shortest gt MULTI PAD STOP Button Fi Loh Chord match on off pad 1 t Chord match on off pad 2 Chord match on off pad 3 F Chord match on off pad 4 MULTI PAD REC Bank User pad set selection 107 Fl zh Chord match on off user pad 1 107 NU Chord match on off user pad 2 107 USUS Chord match on off user pad 3 107 F siste E EDI E PEN IEEE Chord match on off user pad 4 107 ex Shortcut gt R
4. PHONES Ee ct E Bs 19 Be he 7 PSR 730 630 AHA Mac poz A wor Foot voL To HosT SUSAN Li Aux our DC IN Top Panel Controls STAND BY ON Switch page 14 MASTER VOLUME Control page 14 DEMO page 14 TEMPO Buttons 26 TRANSPOSE Buttons page 56 Q ACCOMPANIMENT SONG VOLUME BOONS iced tero Eder pages 29 78 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SECTION AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON OFF Button page 23 e SYNC STOP Button page 28 e SYNC START Button page 24 INTRO Button 11 page 24 MAIN AUTO FILL A amp B Buttons page 24 ENDING page 25 RECORD Button pagse 84 99 106 START STOP Button pages 15 23 25 Q9 DIGITAL MULTI EFFECT SECTION PSR 730 DIGITAL EFFECT SECTION PSR 630 e DIGITAL EQ Button PSR 730 page 51 e REVERB Button page 43 CHORUS Butto
5. 18 Delete File ieee 75 Demonstration 14 Digital Effect eri eite deren 42 Digital Equalizer rint 51 DISK 72 Display Operator erit rci ttu 8 DOG 66 Drum Kit 140 DSP 45 Dual voice aceto 19 Dynamics Rate 39 Dynamics Template 222222 38 BECIS cc DIE idee 42 Ending accompaniment 25 Expand Rate eniin hte Heredes 39 c 2 Freeze Accompaniment Freeze function 60 27 Fingered 1 fingering mode 33 Fingered 2 fingering mode 34 Fingering modes accompaniment 31 Floppy disk 64 Foot Volume uiui reet tee erret enin 13 TE UL 67 Full Keyboard fingering mode 34 GM System Level 1 rite enit 3 Groove amp Dynamics sse 35 Harmony oeer 47 Host 122 eR 8 Initlalidata Send oiii rit 128 Initialization data bac
6. Registration Memory Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR 730 630 NOTE Data Extension Save Load When saving data use a floppy disk User Style 101 104 USR O O staan e PoR Style File Format 730 630 User Pad bank 37 40 USR O O three letters after the file name after Registration Memory bank 01 32 USR the period are called User Style Registration Memory USR ie extension Hie gie tension shows the User Pad Registration Memory USR type of file User Style User Pad USR Since the user songs are directly recorded User Song MID to the disk as you play during recording and read from the disk during playback the Save Load functions are not available The Disk Copy Song Copy and Delete File operations related to the user songs can be executed 55 Disk Operations Using Commercially Available Music Collections Sold Separately The PSR 730 630 can playback commercially available XG GM music collection or YAMAHA DOC collection Disk Orchestra Collection disk files It can also load styles collected on YAMAHA style file disks The PSR 730 630 can handle music disks floppy disks that bear the following marks nisi You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined in the GM standard You can playback songs using the
7. 1 Style Name eae etes Accompaniment style selection 22 User style selection 100 Source chord root setting 148 Source chord type setting 148 Note transposition rule setting 148 Note transposition table setting 149 Highest key setting eese 149 Note range Low limit setting 149 Note range high limit setting 149 Retrigger rule setting User style name User style clear 105 Track clean eue 105 Dr miearicel ecce 103 Song selection teet 76 Play mode selection eene 77 Measure from which to start playback 78 Repeat playback setting 80 Song repeat setting 81 Next song 4 82 User Song selection 85 88 I Record mode Quick Multi selection 88 Part selection Multi record 88 ratore era Measure selection Multi record 92
8. For a major chord press the root key only m Root Key Diagram Cm Auto Accompaniment For a minor chord simultaneously press the root key Split Point 54 and a black key to its left z C7 A Il Ill For a seventh chord simultaneously press the root B CIDE F l key and a white key to its left Accompaniment Auto Accompaniment The FINGERED 1 Mode n The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the AUTO ACCOMPA NIMENT section of the keyboard i e all keys to the left of and including the split point key normally 54 while the PSR 730 630 supplies appropriately orches trated rhythm bass and chord accompaniment in the selected style The FINGERED 1 mode recognizes the following chords Chord Name Abbreviation Normal Voicing Chord C Display NOTE Major M 1 3 5 Notes in parentheses Add ninth 9 1 2 3 5 9 9 can be omitted Sixth 6 1 3 5 6 C6 C6 If you play any three F adjacent keys includ Sixth ninth 6 9 1 2 3 5 6 6 9 6 9 ing black keys the Major seventh M7 1 3 5 70r CM7 CM7 chord sound will be 1 3 5 7 canceled only the Major seventh ninth M7 9 1 2 3 5 7 CM7 9 CM7 9 rhythm instruments will continue playing Major seve
9. MIDI Functions MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other by sending and receiving compatible Note Control Change Program Change and various other types of MIDI data or messages The PSR 730 630 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data The PSR 730 630 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode select MIDI channels voices and effects change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts MIDI messages can be divided into two groups Channel messages and System messages Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the PSR 730 630 can receive transmit Channel Messages The PSR 730 630 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels This is usually expressed as it can play 16 instruments at the same time Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON OFF Program Change for each of the 16 channels Message Name PSR 730 630 Operation Panel Setting Note ON OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each message includes a specific note number which corre sponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is stuck Program Change Voice setting control change bank select MSB
10. 40 Overall f nctions 114 Panel controls feds e 6 Pedal Function list eese 117 Pliories ack eet Ee E es 13 Pitch Bend 54 aur 118 Polyphony iie Ree 133 Power SUPP ycie 12 iii ie lepore M 1 R1 R2 amp 16 Receive channel amp 2 126 Record Ready Mode 85 99 106 Registration bank tenen 58 Registration memory 57 Rehearsal mode 86 101 108 Repeat 80 lap 43 FROVOICING eccL ETE 110 ROOCK Y EM EET 32 Sample disk iieiaeie idasse aap sese ens 76 68 Scale tuning NR eR 115 148 sog 11 Single Finger fingering mode 32 SONG clear LLRs 94 SONG 73 SONG EIE 96 SONG MOde enc 11 Song playback etn nu ee 76 Song recording essen 83 eens 171 Split point auto accompaniment 30 Split point split 21 Split voice
11. NOTE The split point key be comes the highest key in the Auto Ac companiment section of the keyboard When setting the split point that is the sub menu AcmpSplit is shown on the display pressing the key on the keyboard doesn t either produce notes or detect chords in the accompaniment sec tion but only desig nates the split point Auto Accompaniment Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and SPLIT VOICE Split Points The SPLIT VOICE split point page 21 and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point can be independently specified with the following limitations The SPLIT VOICE split point cannot be set at a lower key than the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point if you attempt to do this the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point will be set to the same key as the SPLIT VOICE split point Conversely the AUTO ACCOMPANI MENT split point cannot be set at a higher key than the SPLIT VOICE split point if you attempt to do this the SPLIT VOICE split point will be set to the same key as the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SPLIT VOICE split point split point L accompaniment L Voice AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point SPLIT VOICE split point A R Voice Accompaniment L Voice The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes The PSR 730 630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature has five different fingering modes which can be selected as follows
12. Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged f the instrument is not to be in use for a long time remove the batteries rom it in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery E SAVING USER DATA Always save data to floppy disk frequently in order to help prevent Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to minimum Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or ex modifications to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed treme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or dam Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use age to the internal components Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations 4 9 Congratulations MGR RERUM ERE REM You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard The Yamaha PSR 730 630 PortaTone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state of the art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment
13. 96 Style Recording 98 Style Recording Procedure 98 Rehearsal 101 Drum Cancel 103 Quiattize ee ad 103 Naming Styles essendo eae e ende 104 Clearing User Style 105 Multi Pad Recording 106 Multi Pad Recording Procedure 106 Naming Pads tite ettet Sram nen 109 Clearing User Pad Data 109 Revoicing 110 Revoicing the R1 R2 and L Voices 110 Revoicing a 5 112 Overall Functions 114 Touch Sensitivity esses 115 Pitch Bend Range 115 Modulation Wheel 115 Master TUNING 115 Scale TMM AG C m 115 Song Transpose einer 116 Metronome Split Voice Split 116 Accompaniment Split 116 Fingering Mode es 116 Melle 116 Or 117 MIDI Functions 119 What s 2 22 2 0 22 119 MIDI Terminal TO HOST Terminal 121 What You Can Do with MIDI 121 Connecting to a Per
14. IRING GROOVE amp DYNAMICS X MELODY MELODY m icr P STYLE SONG Multi Pad Recording 2 Select the MULTI PAD Record Mode Press any MULTI PAD button 1 4 to select the MULTI PAD record mode the MULTI PAD button you press will be selected for recording The MULTI PAD menu will automatically be selected and a user pad set number will appear on the top line of the display The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo indicating that the record ready synchro start mode is engaged MULTI PAD CIC i Fa i MENU Y g 1 DISK co D mn 1 eee LILI I 4 TEMPO REPEAT MEASURE BEAT MULTI PAD n AGMP SONG VOICE GI Si 3 ENA Pasos VOLUME REGISTRATION MEMORY MULTI PAD REGIST MEMORY DEMO 3 If Necessary Select a User Pad Set Number If the desired user pad set is not already selected use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to select as required 4 If Necessary Select a MULTI PAD to Record If the MULTI PAD you pressed in step 2 above is not the one you want to record you can select any other pad at this point simply pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD button The selected MULTI PAD icon will appear in the display A is Le Je 822 Da PAD 5 Specify Chord Match if Required If you record
15. The STYLE tracks record the following operations and data Note on off Velocity Voice number drum kit number Pitch bend Only one event of the item marked with can be recorded for each track of the sections p Style Recording Procedure 1 Select Style To Begin With Select the style from one of the 100 presets that is closest to the type of style you want to create You will use this style as a starting point for the user style you will create Example 1 When you want to create a user style with 8 beats in 4 4 time select style number 001 8 Beat Pop Example 2 When you wantto create a user style with 3 4 waltz time select user style 099 Vien Waltz Up to approximately 1 980 notes for a section totally ca 5 940 notes can be recorded in the PSR 730 630 STYLE tracks If none of the preset styles is appropriate select one that has the same time sig nature and number of mea sures as the one you want to create then use the All Clear function page 105 to clear all preset data be fore entering your own If you select a blank user style to begin with 101 104 the style will be in 4 4 time and all sections except FILL will be 2 measures long FILL will be 1 mea sure long Style Recording 2 Engage the Record Ready Mode Press the RECORD button to engage the record ready mode The RECORD button indicator will light and the SONG STYL
16. lt lt lt 21 A 1 lt 22 1 lt lt lt lt 23 B 1 lt lt lt lt 24 co lt lt lt lt 25 C 0 lt lt lt lt 26 DO lt lt lt lt 27 D 0 lt lt lt 28 EO Reverse Cymbal lt g lt 29 FO lt g lt lt 30 F 0 Hi Q lt lt lt 31 90 AnSD Snappy lt Brush Slap L 32 G 0 lt lt lt lt 33 0 AnBD Dance 1 g lt Bass Drum L2 34 A 0 AnSD OpenRim lt lt lt 35 BO AnBD Dance 2 lt lt Gran Casa 36 C1 AnBD Dance 3 BD Jazz BD Sof Gran Casa Mute Guitar Cutting Noise Dial Tone 37 C 1 Analog Side Stick lt lt lt Guitar Cutting Noise 2 Door Creaking 38 D1 AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M Door Slam 39 D 1 lt lt lt lt String Slap Scratch 40 E1 AnSD Ana Acoustic SD Jazz H Brush Tap Marching Sn H Scratch 2 41 F1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Windchime 42 F 1 i AnHH Closed 3 lt lt lt Telephone Ring2 43 G1 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 44 Ghi 71 Analog HH Closed 2 lt lt lt 45 1 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 46 A 1 i AnHH Open 2 lt 47 1 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 48 C2 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 49 C 2 Analog Cymbal lt lt Hand Cym Open
17. initial default set ting for all channels is Normal In the Record mode the Receive mode cannot be set MIDI Functions Clock Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required When disabled Off all of the time based functions Auto Accompaniment SONG recording and playback etc are controlled by its own internal clock When MIDI clock reception is enabled however all timing is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal in this case the PSR 730 630 TEMPO setting has no effect The default setting is Off Bl Initial Data Send Transmits all current panel settings to asecond PSR 730 630 or a MIDI data storage device To send the initial data select the Init Send Sure Then press the YES to begin transmission of the initial data If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for recording execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the performance on the PSR 730 630 to an external sequencer NOTE yy External Clock is Off be default when the power is initially turnd on When External Clock is turned On AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback cannot be started via the panel START STOP but ton or started via the synchro start function Also the MULTI PAD playback cannot be initiated by pressing the MULT PADs When External Clock is turned
18. 4 20 Stand by ON switch 14 Start modes accompaniment 23 Stop Accompaniment function 25 Jis EET 66 ea te utendi 11 Style 22 Style revoice 112 SUSTAIN JACK 13 S staini Pedal tenir 13 Synchro Stop function 2 28 Synchronized start 24 System 45 143 Tempo accompaniment 26 HM 121 Touch sensitlVIDy 115 Track assignment minus one 79 Track muting accompaniment 28 Transmit channel amp track 125 TRAMISPOSIIO IN ss 2c sis cece 56 TROUDISSMOOUNG tinet fieret 151 Variation DSP nn E ee pere ies 46 Velocity ap 119 Virtual Arranger rds eene 29 VOICE re 133 VOICE SO lia i M 116 Voice 110 Voices 16 Voices selecting amp 17 Volume control 29 Volume control 0 2 78 Volume harmony 48 rp 3 Limited Warranty
19. HARMONY Appears when the HARMONY effect is turned on page 47 SYNC STOP Appears when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SYNC STOP function is engaged page 28 FINGERING Shows the currently selected fingering mode page 32 CHORD Displays the current chord name during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback or SONG recording playback page 25 GROOVE amp DYNAMICS PSR 730 Appears when the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS function is engaged page 36 iw 6 Keyboard Settings VOICE R1 VOICE R2 VOICE L These icons indicate the on off status and volume settings for the L R2 and R1 voices when the DUAL VOICE and or SPLIT VOICE functions are used pages 19 20 They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE function page 110 During Multi recording playback of songs they indicate the on off status volume velocity and voice settings for tracks 14 16 page 86 Basic Display Operation MENU Main Menu Selection VOICE STYLE SONG Buttons You can select one of the three main VOICE STYLE SONG menus by pressing the appropriate button to the right of the display The menu icon will move to indicate the menu you have selected Selecting Other Menus MENU A V Buttons You can select one of the seven DISK MULTI PAD REGIST MEMORY MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menus on the left of the display by pressing the A W MENU buttons at the lower
20. buttons or data dial to turn the CHORD MATCH function for cw p oe 29 11 3 the selected pad or off as required The CHORD MATCH ON OFF setting is re stored to its original status whenever a preset MULTI PAD set is selected BEB e When the CHORD MATCH ON OFF sta tus of a user MULTI CL PAD see page 107 set is changed the new status is re corded with the 9 MULTI PAD data Disk Operations There is a disk drive installed in the PSR 730 630 By inserting a floppy disk into it you can do many things record and playback user songs save and load user styles page 98 user pads page 106 or registration memory data page 57 You can save any number of user styles and registration data on floppy disks make song libraries or find many other ways to make playing the PSR 730 630 more efficient There is a sample disk packed with the PSR 730 630 It contains 20 XG songs and 8 style files To play back the songs see page 76 To load the styles see page 70 Floppy Disk Handling Precautions Floppy disks are an inexpensive convenient and reliable way to store your music data They are not indestructable however and should be handled with care Observe the following points to ensure the long term safety of your disks and data Type of Disk Use the 3 5 inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks with the PSR 730 630 Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks e Never attempt to eject a disk during a r
21. 1 Select the Fingering Mode Function Use the MENU A and F buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular Ez indicator next to OVERALL on the left side of the display You can jump directly to the FingerMode MENU MIDI function by pressing and holding the AUTO DIGITAL EFFECT J ACCOMPANIMENT OVERALL ON OFF button for a few seconds GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Auto Accompaniment Then use the SUB MENU A and W buttons to select the FingerMode function NOTE from within the OVERALL menu The abbreviated name of the current fingering The default Fingering mode will appear to the right of FingerMode on the top line of the display Mode is Multi 2 Select the Required Fingering Mode Use the and buttons or Data Dial to select the desired fingering mode Single Single Finger Fingered 1 Fingered 2 Full Key Full Keyboard Multi Multi finger The SINGLE FINGER Mode Single finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major seventh minor and minor seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used Section o 3 For a minor seventh chord simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left
22. 3 L R1 R2 4 R1 R2 L 5 R1 R2 L 6 Harmony 1 R1 R2 L 7 Harmony 2 R1 R2 L 8 Harmony 3 R1 R2 L 9 ACMP 1ch RHYTHM2 R1 2 L 10 ACMP 2ch RHYTHM1 11 ACMP 3ch BASS R1 RA L 12 ACMP 4ch CHORD 1 R1 R2 L 13 ACMP 5ch CHORD2 R1 R2 L 14 ACMP 6ch PAD R1 R2 L 15 ACMP 7ch PHRASE1 R1 R2 L 16 ACMP 8ch PHRASE2 R1 R2 L When recording accompaniment tracks 9 16 first turn Auto Accompaniment on NOTE 2 and then press the TRACK buttons numbered 9 16 to select 9 16 tracks for recording Pressing any of the TRACK buttons under the tracks will let you select any tracks such as RHYTHM 1 track and BASS track only for recording re r EA VOICE VOICE VOICE ACCOMPANIMENT Eu Bog RT N OF SA Zn LI nis mmm SONG TRACK R2 R1 Y E If the part selected for a track is the same one as that being re corded that track cannot be set for re cording at the same time Only one track can be selected with the last chosen hav ing priority Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once recording has started Song Recording The harmony notes type 7 16 can be recorded to the tracks 6 8 To record harmony notes first turn Harmony on and then press the TRACK buttons numbered 6 8 to select 6 8 tracks for recording p m HARMONY VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 Ri wW ACC
23. 82 4 lt lt lt lt 83 B4 lt lt lt lt 84 C5 lt lt g Dog Machine Gun 85 C 5 Horse Gallo Laser Gun 86 D5 Bird 2 Explosion 87 D 5 FireWork 88 E5 89 F5 90 F 5 Ghost 91 G5 Maou Style List No Name No Name No Name 8BEAT ROCK LATIN 1 8Beat Pop 1 35 8Beat Rock Ballad 71 Bossa Nova 1 2 8Beat Pop 2 36 16Beat Rock Ballad 72 Bossa Nova 2 3 8Beat Uptempo 37 Hard Rock 73 Bossa Nova 3 4 8Beat Standard 38 Rock Shuffle 74 Salsa 5 Folkrock 39 6 8 Heavy Rock 75 Samba 6 Pop Rock 1 40 US Rock 76 Mambo 7 Pop Rock 2 41 16Beat Rock 77 Beguine 8 8Beat Medium RHYTHM amp BLUES 78 Merengue 9 8Beat Ballad 42 R amp B 79 Bolero Lento 10 Epic Ballad 43 Funk 2 80 Espagnole 11 Piano Ballad 44 Soul 81 Cajun 16BEAT 45 Gospel Shuffle CARIBBEAN 12 16Beat Pop 46 6 8 Gospel 82 Reggae 12 13 16Beat Shuffle 1 47 4 4 Blues 83 Pop Reggae 14 16Beat Shuffle 2 ROCK amp ROLL BALLROOM LATIN 15 16Beat Ballad 1 48 Rock amp Roll 1 84 Cha Cha 16 16Beat Ballad 2 49 Rock amp Roll 2 85 Rhumba 17 16Beat Ballad 3 50 Boogie 86 Pasodoble 18 Funk 1 51 Twist 87 Tango Continental 19 Soul Ballad COUNTRY amp WESTERN BALLROOM STANDARD 6 8 BALLAD 52 Bluegrass 1 88 Foxtrot 20 Slow Rock 1 53 Bluegrass 2 89 Jive 21 Slow Rock 2 54 Country 2 4 90 Hully Gully 22 6 8 Balla
24. format an extension of the GM standard that allows for much higher sound quality You can playback song files collected on these disks using the voices defined oRchestRA in Yamaha s DOC format Sm You can load and play with the style files collected on these disks Try playing some of the songs on the included Sample Disk 1 insert the Sample Disk into the Disk Drive Once the disk is inserted the menu icon on the display will automatically switch to the song menu and the currently selected song name and song number will appear at the upper left of the display The PSR 730 630 will switch into Song Mode The SONG icon will light along with the DISK floppy disk icon and the XG icon Li xe TRANSPOSE VOLUME REGISTRATION 2 Start and Stop the Song Press the START STOP button and playback of the Sample Disk song will begin START STOP 9 For details see page 76 Song Playback NOTE With song data soft ware that includes lyr ics you can view the lyrics in the display during playback Con sult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is compatible with the Lyrics Display func tion of the PSR 730 630 Disk Operations Setting up commercially available floppy disks 3 5 inch 2HD 2DD type for use with the PSR 730 630 is called formatting Follow the steps below to format a disk insert the Disk into the Disk Drive Insert a commer
25. kino Song Repeat feature is ON the song will replay re peatedly regardless of whether the play mode is set for Single or All Doing any of the fol lowing operations will automatically cause the song repeat func tion to turn off Changing the song number Specifying the Next Song function page 82 Setting the Play Mode to All page 77 START STOP Song Playback The Next Song feature is handy when the next song you want to play isn t the one with the next song number 1 Select the first song you want to play To select the song see page 76 2 Select the next song After making sure that the SONG menu is selected use the SUB MENU A and VW buttons so that NextSong appears on the display The current NextSong setting will be shown on the top line of the display Use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to select the next song 3 Start Playback Playback will begin as soon as the START STOP button is pressed When the first song is finished playback will continue with the next song If the START STOP button is pressed once again or when the next song finishes playback will automatically stop START STOP When All is selected in the Play mode see page 77 setting the Next song will auto matically change the Play mode from All to Single If the Song Repeat feature is ON the next s
26. then use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select Rev Return The currently set return level will be displayed on the right of the top line of the display Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to set the desired reverb return level the current return level value appears to the right of Rev Return on the display The range is from 0 to 127 The higher the value the greater the return level Digital Effects The REVERB ON OFF status will be set auto matically according to the selected R1 panel voice You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT REVERB TYPE function by pressing and holding the REVERB button for a few seconds NOTE When you select a differ zw fj ent Style the appropriate Reverb type will be se lected accordingly Some of the Styles contain Re verb types which cannot be selected on the PSR 730 630 In this case XG Reverb will be displayed when you select the SUB MENU Reverb of the DIGITAL EFFECT If you don t want to apply the Reverb effect to Styles or Songs select 13 OFF from the Reverb types or set the Reverb Return Level to 0 In ei ther case no Reverb will be applied to the entire system If you use the Revoice function you can set the Reverb Depth for each track of the Style in dependently see page 110 Digital Effects If you press the CHORUS button the CHORUS icon will li
27. 0 64 100 FantaBel 470 455 0 45 63 VelBrss2 529 514 0 0 88 NewAgePd 593 578 0 96 100 Smokey 471 456 0 64 63 AnaBrss2 530 515 0 64 88 Fantasy2 594 579 0 0 101 Goblins 531 516 0 0 89 Warm Pad 595 580 0 64 101 GobSyn 532 517 0 16 89 ThickPad 596 581 0 65 101 50sSciFi psR 730 PSR 690 Bank Select MIDI Bank Select MIDI Voice Voice Eum Voice Name Voice Voice uin Voice Name Number Number MSB LSB Number Number Number MSB LSB Narnie 597 582 0 66 101 Ring Pad 659 644 0 0 121 BrthNoiz 598 583 0 67 101 Ritual 660 645 0 0 122 Seashore 599 584 0 68 101 ToHeaven 661 646 0 0 123 Tweet 600 585 0 70 101 Night 662 647 0 0 124 Telphone 601 586 0 71 101 Glisten 663 648 0 0 125 Helicptr 602 587 0 96 101 BelChoir 664 649 0 0 126 Applause 603 588 0 0 102 Echoes 665 650 0 0 127 Gunshot 604 589 0 8 102 EchoPad2 SFX 605 590 0 14 102 Echo Pan 666 651 64 0 0 CuttngNz 606 591 0 64 102 EchoBell 667 652 64 0 1 CttngNz2 607 592 0 65 102 Big Pan 668 653 64 0 3 Str Slap 608 593 0 66 102 669 654 64
28. 02 01 70 71 72 73 74 75 TOTAL SIZE 6 lt Table 1 5 gt MIDI Parameter Change table MULTI EQ PSR 730 ONLY Address H 02 40 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A OB 0C 0D 0 OF 10 11 12 13 14 TOTAL SIZE 15 Size H ms pd nds res eee eee Size 1 Data H 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dat H 34 34 04 01 00 34 4 4 28 78 01 4 OE 36 01 34 78 4C OE 36 01 34 78 4C OE 36 01 34 1 01 00 78 4C 78 01 Prameter Name Vari Param 6 MSB Vari Param 6 LSB Vari Param 7 MSB Vari Param 7 LSB Vari Param 8 MSB Vari Param 8 LSB Vari Param 9 MSB Vari Param 9 LSB Vari Param 10 MSB Vari Param 10 LSB Variation Return Variation Pan Send Vari To Reverb Send Vari To Chorus Variation Connection Variation Part MW Vari Ctrl Depth PB Vari Ctrl Depth CAT Vari Ctrl Depth Not Used Not Used Variation Parameter 11 Variation Parameter 12 Variation Parameter 13 Variation Parameter 14 Variation Parameter 15 Variation Parameter 16 Prameter Name EQ Type EQ Gainl EQ Frequencyl EQ Q1 EQ
29. Insert Source Disk will appear again on the display Eject the copy destination disk and insert the source disk Follow the messages on the display and repeat to change the disks The number of times you repeat the disk changes depend on the size of the data to be copied Once all the data has been copied the display will return to the Disk Copy YES Song Copy The songs recorded on a floppy disk can be copied in file units to another location on the same disk 1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive Insert the disk with the songs you want to copy into the disk drive NOTE While data is copying Now Copying or Now Reading is dis played never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off NOTE If you want to cancel the Disk Copy func tion in this step press the NO button to cancel the operation returning to Disk Copy YES display NOTE The disk type of both source disk and desti nation disk must be the same 2DD or 2HD If the source disk is 2HD type use 2HD blank disk for the destination If you in sert a wrong type Disk Media Type Er ror will be shown on the display If you insert a wrong disk different from the source or destination disk during the disk copy operation Disk Type Error will be shown on the display Disk Operations 2 Select a Song Copy Function Use the MENU A and W buttons to select the Disk function so
30. NOTE ON OFF 9nH 2B 107 6B TT CONTROL CHANGE TENA es BANK SELECT MSB BnH 00H 25 mm ES BANK SELECT LSB BnH 20H 30 112 70 MODULATION BnH 01H 31 113 71 PORTAMENTO TIME BnH 05H 32 114 72 DATA ENTRY MSB BnH 06H 33 115 73 DATA ENTRY LSB BnH 26H 34 116 74 MAIN VOLUME BnH 07H 22 am D PANPOT BnH 0AH 118 EXPRESSION BnH 0BH SUSTAIN BnH 40H T F PORTAMENTO BnH 41H a ER T TA SOSTENUTO BnH 42H 55 Em 198 B SOFT PEDAL BnH 43H 60 3c 124 7C HARMONIC CONTENT BnH 47H 61 3D 125 7D RELEASE TIME BnH 48H 62 3E 126 7E ATTACK TIME BnH 49H 63 127 7F BRIGHTNESS BnH 4AH PORTAMENTO CONTROL BnH 54H REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH 5BH Except the table above for example 144 159 decimal 9nH 1001 0000 1001 CHORUS SEND LEVEL BnH 5DH 1111 binary displays the Note On Message for each channel 1 16 176 191 VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH 5EH BnH 1011 0000 1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for each DATA INCREMENT BnH 60H channel 1 16 192 207 CnH 1100 0000 1100 1111 displays the Program DATA DECREMENT BnH 61H Change Message for each channel 1 16 240 FOH 1111 0000 denotes the NRPN LSB BnH 62H start of a System Exclusive Message 247 F7H 1111 0111 denotes the end of BEES BnH 63H a System Exclusive Message VIBRATO RATE BnH 63H 01H 62H 08H 06H mmH hexidecimal 0aaaaaaa binary denotes the data address The address VIBRATO RATE BnH 63H 01H 62H 08H 06H mmH contains High Mid and Low VIBRATO DEPTH BnH 63H 01H
31. english xg Special MIDI cables sold separately must be used for connecting to MIDI de vices They can be bought that a specialized MIDI interface device is not necessary In the rear panel of the PSR 730 630 there are two kinds of terminals the MIDI terminals and the TO HOST terminal e MIDI IN Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device at music stores etc 4 Never use MIDI cables MIDI OUT Transmits the PSR 730 630 s keyboard information as MIDI data to longer than about 15 another MIDI device meters Cables longer 5 than this can pick e TO HOST Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer noisewhich causa data errors MIDI TO HOST IN OUT eo Qu 1 p What You Can Do with MIDI Remotely play another PSR 730 630 MIDI transmit MIDI OUT MIDI IN PSR 730 630 PSR 730 630 O O 4M MIDI IN um MIDI OUT MIDI receive Initial send transmit receive page 128 Use the PSR 730 630 as a multi tone generator playing 16 channels at one time Receive mode for all channels set to normal PSR 730 630 UI 4A MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI Receive 5 Personal computer MIDI receive settings page 126 QY700 etc MIDI Functions Play music from another keyboard no tone generator using the PSR 730 630 XG tone generator MIDI re
32. menu Song Playback The songs will be displayed in sequence as follows Demo Song 001 Disk Song 001 Demo Song 001 Selecting a Disk Song Quickly When selecting a Demo Song hold the 3 button down until the Ed icon lights then NOTE enter the Disk Song number using the 1 0 number buttons Song data of a certain commercially avail able song disk may Example Selecting Disk Song number 2 use the voices which Press 3 and hold until the DISK icon lights are not built in the 2 PSR 730 630 In this case nothing will be shown on the voice number display of the appropriate track r1 J 16 REPEAT LI SONG B TRANSPOSE ACIOLUME S REGISTRATION o Ys CJ Ye 3 Select Play Mode Press the SUB MENU A and V buttons so that Play Mode appears on the display On the right of the top line of the display the current play mode will be Selecting All here displayed Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the play mode for cancels the Next song pl ayb ack setting see page 82 Single Play through the selected song then stop Alla st Continue playback through all the songs on the floppy disk If there is no floppy disk inserted in the drive this setting will be ignored 4 Start Stop the Song Press the START STOP button and start playback of the song To stop playback part
33. 0 Square 2 Synth Effects 436 421 0 64 54 AnaVoice 495 480 0 LMSquare 558 543 0 0 96 Rain 437 422 0 0 55 Orch Hit 496 481 0 Hollow 559 544 0 45 96 ClaviPad 438 423 0 35 55 OrchHit2 497 482 0 Shmoog 560 545 0 64 96 HrmoRain 439 424 0 64 55 Impact 498 483 0 Mellow 561 546 0 65 96 AfrcnWnd Brass 499 484 0 SoloSine 562 547 0 66 96 Caribean 440 425 0 0 56 Trumpet 500 485 0 SineLead 563 548 0 0 97 SoundTrk 441 426 0 16 56 Trumpet2 501 486 0 Saw Lead 564 549 0 27 97 Prologue 442 427 0 17 56 BriteTrp 502 487 0 Saw 2 565 550 0 64 97 Ancestrl 443 428 0 32 56 WarmTrp 503 488 0 ThickSaw 566 551 0 0 98 Crystal 444 429 0 0 57 Trombone 504 489 0 DynaSaw 567 552 0 12 98 SynDrCmp 445 430 0 18 57 Trmbone2 505 490 0 DigiSaw 568 553 0 14 98 Popcorn 446 431 0 0 58 Tuba 506 491 0 Big Lead 569 554 0 18 98 TinyBell 447 432 0 16 58 Tuba2 507 492 0 HeavySyn 570 555 0 35 98 RndGlock 448 433 0 0 59 Mute Trp 508 493 0 WaspySyn 571 556 0 40 98 GlockChi 449 434 0 0 60 Fr Horn 509 494 0 PulseSaw 572 557 0 41 98 ClearBel 450 435 0 6 60 FrHrSolo 510 495 0 Dr Lead 573 558 0 42 98 ChorBell 451 436 0 32 60 FrHorn2 511 496 0 VeloLead 574 559 0 64 98 SynMalet 452 437 0 37 60 HornOrch 512
34. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TF 01 Prameter Name Reverb Send Variation Send Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Filter Cutoff Freq Filter Resonance EG Attack Time EG Decay Time EG Release Time MW Pitch Control MW Filter Control MW Amp Control MW LFO PMod Depth MW LFO FMod Depth MW LFO AMod Depth Bend Pitch Control Bend Filter Control Bend Amp Control Bend LFO PMod Depth Bend LFO FMod Depth Bend LFO AMod Depth Not Used Not Used Scale Tuning C Scale Tuning C Scale Tuning D Scale Tuning D Scale Tuning E Scale Tuning F Scale Tuning F Scale Tuning G Scale Tuning G Scale Tuning A Scale Tuning A Scale Tuning B CAT Pitch Control CAT Filter Control CAT Amplitude Control CAT LFO PMod Depth CAT LFO FMod Depth CAT LFO AMod Depth Not Used Not Used Portamento Switch Portamento Time Not Used Not Used Description 64 63 24 24 semitones 9600 9450 cent 100 100 0 127 0 127 0 127 24 24 semitones 9600 9450 cent 100 100 0 127 0 127 0 127 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64 63 cent 64
35. 179 0 118 80 Tiny Lead 180 0 118 81 Sub Aqua 181 0 119 81 Fargo Synth Pad 182 0 113 94 Insomnia 183 0 112 90 Krypton 184 0 113 99 Cyber Pad 185 0 112 95 Wave 2001 186 0 112 94 Equinox 187 0 114 88 Stargate 188 0 112 92 DX Pad 189 0 112 93 Loch Ness 190 0 112 88 Fantasia 191 0 115 88 Golden Age 192 0 112 91 Xenon Pad 193 0 112 89 Area 51 194 0 112 99 Atmosphere 195 0 113 89 Dark Moon 196 0 115 94 lonosphere 197 0 113 93 Phase IV 198 0 113 88 Symbiont 199 0 114 94 Solaris 200 0 113 95 Transform Drum Kits 201 127 0 0 Std Kit1 202 127 0 1 Std Kit2 203 127 0 8 Room Kit 204 127 0 16 Rock Kit 205 127 0 24 Electro Kit 206 127 0 25 Analog Kit 207 127 0 27 Dance Kit 208 127 0 32 Jazz Kit 209 127 0 40 Brush Kit 210 127 0 48 Classic Kit 211 126 0 0 SFX Kit 212 126 0 1 SFX Kit2 Voice Bank Select Bran gram Voice Name Number MSB Lsg Change Number Solo Brass 119 0 112 56 SoloTrumpet 120 0 114 56 SoftTrumpet 121 0 113 56 Flugel Horn 122 0 112 59 Muted Trp 123 0 112 57 Trombone 124 0 114 57 MelTrombone 125 0 112 60 French Horn 126 0 112 58 Tuba Brass Ensemble 127 0 113 61 BigBandBrs 128 0 112 61 BrasSection 129 0 116 61 MellowBrass 130 0 117 61 Small Brass 131 0 118 61 Pop Brass 132 0 119 61 MellowHorns 133 0 113 59 BallroomBrs 134 0 114 61 Full Horns 135 0 115 61 High Brass 136 0 113 57 Trb Section 137 0 112 62 Synth Brass 138 0 112 63 Anal
36. 36 0 115 17 Mellow Draw 95 0 112 46 Harp 37 0 116 16 Bright Draw 96 0 113 46 Hackbrett 38 0 112 18 Rock Organ1 97 0 112 106 Shamisen 39 0 113 18 Rock Organ2 98 0 112 107 Koto 40 0 114 18 Purple Org 99 0 112 104 Sitar 41 0 116 17 60 s Organ 100 0 112 105 Banjo 42 0 117 17 Blues Organ Ensemble 43 0 117 16 16 1 Organ 101 0 112 48 Strings 44 0 118 16 16 2 Organ 102 0 113 48 OrchStrings 45 0 119 16 1644 Organ 103 0 114 48 Symphon Str 46 0 118 17 Elec Organ 104 0 113 49 SlowStrings 47 0 114 16 TheatreOrg1 105 0 114 49 Str Quartet 48 0 114 17 TheatreOrg2 106 0 115 48 ConcertoStr 49 0 112 19 Pipe Organ 107 0 115 49 MarcatoStrs 50 0 113 19 ChapelOrgan 108 0 112 49 ChamberSirs 51 0 112 20 Reed Organ 109 0 112 44 TremoloStrs Accordion 110 0 112 45 PizzStrings 52 0 113 21 Trad Accrd 111 0 112 50 Syn Strings 53 0 112 21 Musette 112 0 112 51 Analog Strs 54 0 112 23 Tango Accrd 113 0 112 52 Choir 55 0 113 23 Bandoneon 114 0 112 54 Air Choir 56 0 114 21 Soft Accrd 115 0 113 52 Vocal Ensbl 57 0 112 22 Harmonica 116 0 112 53 Vox Humana Guitar 117 0 113 53 Gothic Vox 58 0 112 24 Classic Gtr 118 0 112 55 Orch Hit Voice List Bank Select MIDI voice Program Voice Name Number MSB LsB Change Number 177 0 116 80 Hi Bias 178 0 117 80 Meta Wood
37. 41 30 FeedbGt2 408 393 0 8 48 SlowStr 349 334 0 0 31 GtrHarmo 409 394 0 24 48 ArcoStr amp Voice List Bank Select MD pongo Bank Select MDI sry Bank Select MDI Voice Voice Gea Voice Name Voice Voice Change Voice Name Voice Voice Change Voice Name Number Number MSB LSB Number Number Number MSB LSB Number Number MSB LSB Number 410 395 0 35 48 60sStrng Reed 533 518 0 17 89 Soft Pad 411 1396 0 40 48 Orchestr 472 457 0 0 64 SprnoSax 534 519 0 18 89 SinePad 412 397 0 41 48 Orchstr2 473 458 0 0 65 Alto Sax 535 520 0 64 89 Horn Pad 413 398 0 42 48 TremOrch 474 459 0 40 65 536 521 0 65 89 RotarStr 414 399 0 45 48 VeloStr 475 460 0 43 65 HyprAlto 537 522 0 0 90 PolySyPd 415 400 0 0 49 Strings2 476 461 0 0 66 TenorSax 538 523 0 64 90 PolyPd80 416 401 0 3 49 SSIwStr 477 462 0 40 66 BrthTnSx 539 524 0 65 90 ClickPad 417 402 0 8 49 LegatoSt 478 463 0 41 66 SoftTenr 540 525 0 66 90 Ana Pad 418 403 0 40 49 Wa
38. 63 cent 24 24 semitones 9600 9450 cent 100 100 0 127 0 127 0 127 off on 0 127 Default Value H 28 00 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 0A 00 00 42 40 40 00 00 00 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 00 00 00 00 00 MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format Table 1 8 MIDI Parameter Change table DRUM SETUP Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default H H H Value H 3n m 00 00 7F Pitch Coarse 64 63 40 3n m 01 00 7F Pitch Fine 64 63 cent 40 m 02 1 00 7F Level 0 127 Depend on the Note 3n m 03 00 7F Alternate Group O off 1 127 Depend on the Note 3n m 04 00 7F Pan O random Depend on the Note L63 C R63 1 64 127 3n m 05 00 7F Reverb Send Level 0 127 Depend the Note 3n 06 1 00 7 Chorus Send Level 0 127 Depend on the Note 3n m 07 1 00 7F Variation Send Level 0 127 7 3n 08 1 00 01 Key Assign O single 1 multi 00 3n m 09 00 01 Rev Note Off off on Depend on the Note 3n m 00 01 Rev Note On off on 01 3n m OB 00 7F Filter Cutoff Freq 64 63 40 3n m 0 00 7F Filter Resonance 64 63 40 3n m OD 00 7F EG Attack Rate 64 63 40 OE 1 00 7F EG Decay Rate 64 63 40 3n m OF 00 7F EG Decay2 Rate 64 63 40 TOTAL SIZE 10 n Drum Setup Number 0 1 rr note number 0DH 5BH If XG SYSTEM ON and or GM On message is received all Drum Setup Paramete
39. 7 buttons or the Data Dial to set the Expand Rate value within a range of 0 400406 NOTE Though Expand Rate can be adjusted by a rate of 1 in 100 the rate actually applied will be rounded down to nearest 10 For ex ample the rates 1 through 9 result in 0 no effect The rates 29 and 53 result in 20 and 50 respectively When using the Reg istration Memory func tion the result rate will be memorized Auto Accompaniment Set the Boost Rate Ez Shortcut The Boost Rate strengthens or weakens the Accompaniment by offsetting the velocity x You can jump directly value of the Style data within the range 0 100 original 400 to the BeatGroove sub menu of the Use the SUB MENU A F buttons to select the BoostRate function from GROOVE amp DYNAM within the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menu The currently set Boost Rate value will ICS meny Beat Groove Template se appear on the right of the top line of the display lection screen by pressing and holding the GROOVE amp DY NAMICS button for a few seconds Use the 1 0 number buttons the buttons or the Data Dial to set the Boost am p m User settings will be Rate value within a range of 0 400 lost when another ac companiment style is selected To be able to recall your original settings anytime save them using the Regis tration Memory func tion page 57 Though Boost Rate can be adjusted by a rate of 1
40. 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America hereafter referred to as Yamaha warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below that the product will be free of defects in materials and or workmanship for the periods indicated This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and or workmanship Yamaha and or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date Yamaha will subject to theterms ofthis warranty supply these parts without charge However charges for labor and or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUE
41. A large graphic display and easy to use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument In orderto make the most of your PortaTone s features and extensive performance potential we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference The LCD displays as illustrated in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument The displays from the PSR 730 are used for the instructions and descriptions in this manual emn Iip rtant Featunes WW 61 key keyboard for a wide range of dynamic musical expression page 115 EA variety of voices 215 panel voices 200 panel voices for PSR 630 12 drum kits and 480 XG voices with the maximum polyphony of 64 voices 32 voices for PSR 630 Y mE us set feature automaticaly selects the appropriate voice parameter settings for the panel voices page 116 auto accompaniment technol ogy gives you 100 fully orchestrated accompani ment styles to back up what you play on the keyboard page 22 v na Arranger feature lets you add chord progressions to any of the auto accompaniment styles for more musical refined accompaniment page 29 EP Touch Setting feature automatically selects appropriate voice effect and other set tings for the s
42. O 9nH v 1 127 X After key s Touch Ch s X Ox Pitch Bender Control Change 0 32 1 5 7 10 11 6 38 64 67 71 74 72 73 84 91 93 94 96 97 98 99 100 101 120 121 O Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Sound Controller Sound Controller Portamento Controllers Effect Depth RPN Inc Dec NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB All Sound Off Reset All Controllers Program Change True O 0 127 kkk kk kkk kkk kkk O OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO O System Exclusive System Song Position Song Select Common Tune System Clock Real Time Commands Aux Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Messages Active Sense Reset Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY 123 127 Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes X No Portable Keyboard Model PSR 630 Function MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Date 14 APR 1997 Version 1 0 Remarks Basic Default Channel Changed Default Messages Altered kk kkk kkk 3 X X Note Number True voice 0 127 kk kkk kkk kkk kkk 0 127 0 127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF O 9nH v 1 127 X 9nH v 0 O 9nH v 1 127 X After key s Touch Ch s X Pitch Bender Control Change 0 32 1 5 7 10 11 6 38 64 67 71 74 72 73 84 91 93
43. On EC will appear on the TEMPO display and tempo cannot be changed with the panel button NOTE During Style Song Multi Pad playback in the synchro start mode and in one of the Record modes the display shows Init Send Sure indicating that you cannot execute the initial data send op eration MIDI Functions MIDI Template The MIDI settings can be collected into a template pattern Just by selecting the template that fits your purpose you can set all the MIDI settings in one operation When you change the Use the MENU A V buttons to select the MIDI menu so that the triangular 2 7 indicator in display appears next to to the left of the display lecting one of the tem Use the SUB MENU A and F buttons so that Template appears on the display 2 Referring to the template list below use the and 4 buttons or the Data Dial to Template will auto select a template matically be selected MIDI Template list 1 XG Module All receive channels are set to Normal When using the PSR 730 630 as the multi timbral XG tone generator 2 Accordion The receive channels are set as follows 1ch Remote 2ch Chord 3ch Bass 4 16ch Off When playing the PSR 730 630 by an external MIDI Accordion The connected MIDI accordion can play the PSR 730 630 and detect chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section 3 MIDI Ped
44. button The ONE TOUCH SETTING and REGIST 1 icons will appear in the display and the One Touch Setting type 1 panel settings will be recalled At the same Auto Accompaniment will automatically be turned on if it was off and the Sync Start mode will be engaged ONE TOUCH SETTING 26 ONE TOUCH SETTING REPEAT 5 B 2 REGISTRATION MEMORY 3 Select a ONE TOUCH SETTING Type as Required If you want to select a different REGISTRATION MEMORY use the REGISTRA TION MEMORY buttons to select the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING type The corresponding number will appearin the display and all setting will change according to the recalled data REGISTRATION MEMORY NE ET NM NN REGISTRATION MEMORY 4 Turn ONE TOUCH SETTING Off When Done Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING button again and the ONE TOUCH SET TING icon in the display will disappear and the One Touch Setting feature will turn off NOTE If the style is changed when One Touch Set ting is on the panel settings appropriate to the selected style that have the same One Touch Setting number will immediately be set You can also try changing the estab lished One Touch Setting data making your own original set tings To be able to recall your original settings anytime save them using the Regis tration Memory func tion page 57 f you press ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons 1 4 when a user style is selected the voice data won t be c
45. data entry MSB LSB RPN D ENTRY LSB MSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE 00H 00H mmH PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 18H 0 24 semitones 01H 00H mmH FINE TUNE mmH IIH 00H 00H 40H 00H 7FH 7FH 8192 100 8192 0 8192 100 8192 02H 00H mmH COARSE TUNE 28H 40H 58H 24 0 24 semitones NULL Clears the current RPN number setting Does not change the internal parameter settings 3 4 NON REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER NRPN Recive only STATUS lOlInnnn BnH 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER NRPN LSB 01100010 62H NRPN LSB NUMBER Oppppppp p NRPN LSB refer to the list below NRPN MSB 01100011 63H NRPN MSB NUMBER 0499999 DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110 06H DATA VALUE q NRPN MSBr refer to the list below Ommmmmmm m Data Value MIDI Data Format First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB LSB then sets the parameter value for data entry MSB LSB NRPN D ENTRY MSB LSB MSBLSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE 01H 08H mmH VIBRATO RATE 00H 40H 7FH 64 0 63 01H 09H mmH VIBRATO DEPTH 00H 40H 7FH 64 0 63 01H OAH mmH VIBRATO DELAY OOH 40H 7FH 64 0 63 01H 20H mmH FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY 40H 7FH 64 0 63 01H 21H mmH FILTER RESONANCE 40H 7FH 64 0 63 01H 63H mmH EG ATTACK TIME 00H 40H 7FH 64 0 63 01H 64H mmH DECAY TIME 00H 40H 7FH 64 0 63 OIH 66H mm
46. i eitis cedunt 7 Rev rb E aed cee cde cd eee 43 Selecting a Reverb Type 43 Basic Display Operation 8 Reverb Return Level eren e eI RR ceases nines 43 44 The Display 5 8 Selecting a Chorus 44 10 Chorus Return 0 44 SHON CUS cS 11 0002 45 Select the DSP 45 Setting Up 12 DSP Ret rnlevel iiit 46 Harmony ee teer Rebus 47 Power Supply 12 Selecting a Harmony Type 47 Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor 12 Adjusting the Harmony Volume 48 Using Batteries 12 Multi Effect 5 730 48 Connections iiie 13 How Multi Effect Works 48 PHONES JacK ete ette 13 Applying Multi Effect PSR 730 49 SUSTAIN Pedal 13 Setting Parts for Effect 1 2 49 FOOT VOLUME Jack ticis 19 Select the Effect Ty
47. or Effect 1 Effect 1 in series Use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT MENU MD Then use the SUB MENU A and buttons to select Effect1 In Effect2 In The name of the currently selected part will appear on the right of the top line of the display Usethe and 4 buttons or Data Dial to select the part you wantto apply the effect DIGITAL EFFECT 4 OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS to IU t e es m ad ell a m am am i 1 P E t T 3 NOTE The MULTI EFFECT ON OFF status will be set automatically ac cording to the se lected H1 panel voice Some of the song files may contain Multi Ef fect settings When you play back such songs Multi Effect button on the panel will automatically be turned off Shortcut You can jump directly to the Effect IN sub menu of the DIGITAL EFFECTS menu by pressing and holding the MULTI EFFECT button for a few sec onds NOTE Effect 1 2 part settings may auto matically change ac cording to the se lected H1 panel voice e may appear the display if you play back the songs con taining Multi Effect settings Digital Effects Select the Effect Type for Effect 1 2 Select one of the 42 effect types for Effect 1 and Effect 2 Use the MENU F an
48. page 11 Playing the PSR 730 630 The PSR 730 630 actually includes two voice sets the panel voices and percussion kits and the XG voices The panel voices include 215 pitched voices 200 pitched voices for PSR 630 and 12 drum kits while the XG voice set includes 480 voices When XG voice is selected an XG icon is displayed under the voice number at the top of the display PSR 730 PSR 630 Panel Voices Voice numbers 1 215 Voice numbers 1 200 Drum Kits Voice numbers 216 227 Voice numbers 201 212 XG Voices Voice numbers 228 707 Voice numbers 213 692 Choose a voice you like and try it out Refer to the panel voice list or XG voice list when selecting voices page 133 See page 3 for information about XG a A Word About the R1 R2 and L Voices The PSR 730 630 allows up to three voices to be selected at the same time R1 Right hand 1 R2 Right hand 2 and L Left hand The R1 voice is the basic voice of the PSR 730 630 and it s used when you re playing a single voice over the entire range of the keyboard as with an acoustic piano You can also have two voices play together at the same time R1 voice and R2 voice or play different voices with the right and left hands R1 voice and L voice pages 19 20 The numbers of the currently selected R1 R2 and L voices are all shown at the lower right of on the display panel Normally the R1 v
49. 01 Standard 12 0 12 3 0 1 0 5 LowGain LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain 02 Disco 12 0 12 7 2 1 2 7 LowGain LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain 03 Mild 12 0 12 2 2 2 5 0 LowGain LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain 04 Bright 12 0 12 7 2 0 2 7 LowGain LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain 05 Lo Fi 12 jm ED Due a Um e ET oP 10 42 12 3 2 LowGain LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain Digital Effects Setting the Gain User Setting You can change the settings for any of the 5 preset equalizer types adjusting the output to meet your own needs Select the equalizer type you wish to use as a base for your settings then use the SUB MENU VF and A buttons to select LowGain The current LowGain value for the type you selected will be shown on the right of the upper line of the display Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to set the LowGain amplitude change within a range of 12 to 0 to 12 decibels dB Switch to each of the other bands LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain and HighGain and set them in the same way as the LowGain After finishing the gain settings use the SUB MENU W and A buttons to select EQ Type User will appear on the right of the top line of the display l The Pitch Bend Wheel Use the PSR 730 630 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up ro
50. 11 0 113 5 Hyper Tines Guitar 12 0 116 5 New Tines 62 0 112 24 Classic Gtr 13 0 114 5 Venus EP 63 0 113 24 Spanish Gtr 14 0 113 4 Tremolo EP 64 0 112 25 Folk Guitar 15 0 114 2 Rock Piano 65 0 113 25 12StrGuitar 16 0 112 7 Clavi 66 0 112 26 Jazz Guitar 17 0 113 7 Wah Clavi 67 0 113 26 Octave Gtr 18 0 112 6 Harpsichord 68 0 114 26 HawaiianGtr 19 0 113 6 GrandHarpsi 69 0 116 27 BrightClean Chromatic Percussion 70 0 118 27 SolidGuitar 20 0 112 11 Vibraphone 71 0 112 27 CleanGuitar 21 0 113 11 Jazz Vibes 72 0 119 27 Elec 12Str 22 0 112 12 Marimba 73 0 113 27 Tremolo Gtr 23 0 112 13 Xylophone 74 0 114 27 Slap Guitar 24 0 112 114 Steel Drums 75 0 113 28 Funk Guitar 25 0 112 8 Celesta 76 0 112 28 MutedGuitar 26 0 112 9 Glocken 77 0 113 29 FeedbackGtr 27 0 112 10 Music Box 78 0 112 29 Overdrive 28 0 112 14 TubularBells 79 0 112 30 Distortion 29 0 112 108 Kalimba 80 0 115 27 PedalSteel 30 0 112 47 Timpani 81 0 114 25 Mandolin 31 0 112 15 Dulcimer Bass Organ 82 0 112 32 Aco Bass 32 0 112 16 Jazz Organ1 83 0 114 32 Bass amp Cymbal 33 0 113 16 Jazz Organ2 84 0 112 33 FingerBass 34 0 112 17 Click Organ 85 0 112 34 Pick Bass 35 0 113 17 Dance Organ 86 0 112 35 Fretless 36 0 115 16 Drawbar Org 87 0 113 35 Jaco Bass 37 0 115 17 Mellow Draw 88 0 119 14 Organ Bass 38 0 116 16 Bright Draw 89 0 112 36 Slap Bass 39 0 112 18 Rock Organ1 90 0 112 37 Funk Bass 40 0 113 18 Rock Organ2 91 0 113 36 Fusion Bass 41 0 114 18 Purple Org 92 0 112 38 Synth Bass 42 0 116 17
51. 12 11 14 43 4 3 75 75 107 18 6 11 174 43 67 8 75 118 2 107 168 5 11 14 12 12 44 44 76 7 6 108 20 2 12 19 0 44 69 4 76 119 7 108 170 1 12 16 13 1 3 45 45 77 4 109 21 8 13 20 6 45 70 9 77 121 3 109 171 7 13 18 14 14 46 46 78 78 110 23 3 14 22 1 46 72 5 78 122 9 110 173 2 14 20 15 1 5 47 47 79 79 111 249 15 23 7 47 741 79 124 4 111 1748 15 23 16 1 6 48 48 80 8 0 112 26 5 16 25 3 48 75 7 80 126 0 112 176 4 16 26 17 TI 49 49 81 8 1 113 28 0 17 26 9 49 77 2 81 127 6 113 178 0 17 30 18 1 8 50 5 0 82 8 2 114 29 6 18 28 4 50 78 8 82 129 2 114 179 5 18 35 19 1 9 51 54 83 8 3 115 312 19 30 0 51 804 83 130 7 115 181 1 19 40 20 2 0 52 5 2 84 8 4 116 32 8 20 31 6 52 819 84 132 3 116 182 7 21 241 53 5 3 85 8 5 117 34 3 21 33 2 53 83 5 85 133 9 117 1843 22 22 54 54 86 8 6 118 35 9 22 34 7 54 85 1 86 135 5 118 185 8 23 23 55 55 87 8 7 119 375 23 36 3 55 86 7 87 137 0 119 187 4 24 24 56 5 6 88 8 8 120 39 0 24 37 9 56 882 88 138 6 120 189 0 25 25 57 5 7 89 8 9 121 40 6 25 39 5 57 89 8 89 140 2 121 190 6 26 26 58 5 8 90 9 0 122 42 2 26 41 0 58 914 90 141 8 122 192 1 27 27 59 5 9 9t 91 123 437 27 426 59 93 0 91 143 3 123 1937 28 28 60 6 0 92 92 124 45 3 28 44 2 60 94 5 92 144 9 124 195 3 29 29 61 6 1 93 93 125 46 9 29 45 7 61 96 1 93 146 5 125 196 9 30 3 0 62 6 2 94 9 4 126 48 4 30 47 3 62 97 7 94 148 1 126 198 4 31 3 1 63 6 3 95 9 5 127 50 0 31 48 9 63 99 3 95 149 6 127 200 0 Table 3 Table 6 Table 9 EQ
52. 140 fora complete listing of the 216 201 Standard Kit1 222 207 Dance Kit keyboard percussion 217 202 Standard Kit2 223 208 Jazz Kit drum instrument as signments 218 203 Room Kit 224 209 Brush Kit 219 204 Rock Kit 225 210 Classic Kit 220 205 Electronic Kit 226 211 SFX Kit 1 221 206 Analog Kit 227 212 SFX Kit 2 The Dual Voice Mode When the DUAL VOICE mode is engaged you can play two voices the R1and R2 NOTE voices simultaneously across the entire keyboard The R1 R2 voice set The DUAL VOICE mode is turned on and off by pressing the DUAL VOICE tings voice param button When the DUAL VOICE mode is turned on both R2 icons in the display 2 bs 2 will light Press the DUAL VOICE button a second time to turn the DUAL VOICE the REVOICE function mode off the R2 icon in the display will go out leaving only the R1 icon lit i 0g DUAL VOICE n z Q DUAL VOICE W mode can be used at the same time as the SPLIT VOICE mode described below In In the Syle mode the R2 TRACK button below the display second from the right this case the L voice is played on the left hand can also be used to turn the R2 voice on or off as required section of the board while both the 84 109 R1 and R2 voices are played on the right hand section of the keyboard See the The Split Voice Mode section below for more information DUAL P
53. 34 25462 Rellingen F R of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G 3526KL Utrecht The Netherlands Tel 030 2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 02 7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France Division Claviers BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 PK 13 Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN Yamaha Hazen Electronica Musical S A Jorge Juan 30 28001 Madrid Spain Tel 91 577 7270 PORTUGAL Valentim de Carvalho CI SA Estrada de Porto Salvo Pa o de Arcos 2780 Oeiras Portugal Tel 01 443 3398 4030 1823 GREECE Philippe Nakas S A Navarinou Street 13 P Code 10680 Athens Greece Tel 01 364 7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND Warner Music Finland OY Fazer Music Aleksanterinkatu 11 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 0435 011 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Naringspark
54. 497 0 Seq Ana 575 560 0 65 98 SftCryst 453 438 0 0 61 BrasSect 513 498 0 CaliopLd 576 561 0 66 98 LoudGlok 454 439 0 35 61 Tp amp TbSec 514 499 0 Pure Pad 577 562 0 67 98 XmasBell 455 440 0 40 61 BrssSec2 515 500 0 Chiff Ld 578 563 0 68 98 VibeBell 456 441 0 41 61 HiBrass 516 501 0 Rubby 579 564 0 69 98 DigiBell 457 442 0 42 61 MelloBrs 517 502 0 CharanLd 580 565 0 70 98 AirBells 458 443 0 0 62 SynBras1 518 503 0 DistLead 581 566 0 71 98 BellHarp 459 444 0 12 62 QuackBr 519 504 0 WireLead 582 567 0 72 98 Gamelmba 460 445 0 20 62 RezSynBr 520 505 0 Voice Ld 583 568 0 0 99 Atmosphr 461 446 0 24 62 PolyBrss 521 506 0 SynthAah 584 569 0 18 99 WarmAtms 462 447 0 27 62 SynBras3 522 507 0 VoxLead 585 5701 0 19 99 HollwRIs 463 448 0 32 62 JumpBrss 523 508 0 Fifth Ld 586 571 0 40 99 NylonEP 464 449 0 45 62 AnaVelBr 524 509 0 Big Five 587 572 0 64 99 NylnHarp 465 450 0 64 62 AnaBrss1 525 510 0 Bass amp Ld 588 573 0 65 99 Harp Vox 466 451 0 0 63 SynBras2 526 511 0 Big amp Low 589 574 0 66 99 AtmosPad 467 452 0 18 63 Soft Brs 527 512 0 Fat amp Prky 590 575 0 67 99 Planet 468 453 0 40 63 SynBrss4 528 513 0 SoftWurl 591 576 0 0 100 Bright 469 454 0 41 63 ChoirBrs 592 577
55. 5 2 PushC 2 13 3 21 5 PushB 5 2 HeavyA 2 14 4 PushA 4 22 5 PushC 5 2 HeavyB 2 15 4 PushB 4 23 5 5 2 HeavyC 2 16 4 PushC 4 24 5 5 3 PushA 3 17 4 4 25 5 HeavyC 5 3 PushB 3 Auto Accompaniment No Name 1 Thru 2 8beat on 3 8beat off 4 16beat on 5 16beat off 6 2nd Beat Off 7 Dance 8 Disco 9 Techno 10 Fusion 11 Reggae 12 BossaNova 13 Tango 14 Rhumba Bass 15 Rhumba Chord 16 Latin 17 Samba Set the Dynamics Rate The Dynamics Rate sets the amount of the Dynamics template applied to the PSR 730 630 within the range 0 100 Use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select the DynamcsRate function from within the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menu The currently set Dynamics Rate value will appear on the right of the top line of the display Use the 1 0 number buttons the 7 buttons or the Data Dial to set the Dynamics Rate value within a range of 0 100746 Set the Expand Rate The Expand Rate widens or narrows the dynamic range of the Accompaniment within the range 0 100 original 400 Use the SUB MENU A and buttons to select the ExpandRate function from within the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menu The currently set Expand Rate value will appear on the right of the top line of the display Use the 1 0 number buttons the
56. 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Stage 3 4 5 6 3 6 12 13 LFO Phase Difference 180deg 180deg resolution 3deg 4 124 14 15 16 DISTORTION OVERDRIVE variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 e 2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 3 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 4 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 5 Output Level 0 127 0 127 6 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 8 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 10 120 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 11 Edge Clip Curve 0 127 0 127 mild sharg 12 13 14 15 16 COMP DIST variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 e 2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 3 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 4 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 5 Output Level 0 127 0 127 6 7 EQMid Frequency 100 2 10 0 2 14 54 table 3 8 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 10 120 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 11 Edge Clip Curve 0 127 0 127 mild sharpg 12 Attack 1ms 40ms 0 19 table 8 13 Release 10ms 680ms 0 15 table 9 14 Threshold 48dB 6dB 79 121 15 Ratio 1 0 20 0 0 7 table 10 16 MIDI Data Format AMP SIMULAT
57. 60 s Organ 93 0 112 39 Analog Bass 43 0 117 17 Blues Organ 94 0 113 39 Dance Bass 44 0 120 16 Mellow Org 95 0 113 38 Hi Q Bass 45 0 120 17 Perc Organ 96 0 114 38 Rave Bass 46 0 117 16 16 1 Organ Solo Strings 47 0 118 16 16 2 Organ 97 0 112 40 Solo Violin 48 0 119 16 16 4 Organ 98 0 113 40 Soft Violin 49 0 118 17 Elec Organ 99 0 112 110 Fiddle 50 0 114 16 TheatreOrg1 100 0 112 41 Viola 51 0 114 17 TheatreOrg2 101 0 112 42 Cello Voice List MIDI MIDI Voice Bank Select Program Voice Bank Select Program Number MSB Lsg Change Number MSB Lsp Change Number Number 102 0 112 43 Contrabass 165 0 112 68 Oboe 103 0 112 46 Harp 166 0 112 69 EnglishHorn 104 0 113 46 Hackbrett 167 0 112 70 Bassoon 105 0 112 106 Shamisen 168 0 112 109 Bagpipe 106 0 112 107 Koto Pipe 107 0 112 104 Sitar 169 0 112 73 Flute 108 0 112 105 Banjo 170 0 112 75 Pan Flute Ensemble 171 0 112 72 Piccolo 109 0 112 48 Strings 172 0 113 73 EthnicFlute 110 0 113 48 OrchStrings 173 0 112 77 Shakuhachi 111 0 114 48 Symphon Str 174 0 112 78 Whistle 112 0 113 49 SlowStrings 175 0 112 74 Recorder 113 0 114 49 Str Quartet 176 0 112 79 Ocarina 114 0 115 48 ConcertoStr Synth Lead 115 0 115 49 MarcatoStrs 177 0 112 80 Square Lead 116 0
58. 62H 09H 06H mmH VIBRATO DELAY BnH 63H 01H 62H 0AH 06H mmH bbH Obbbbbbb denotes the byte count FILTER CUTOFF FREQ BnH 63H 01H 62H 20H 06H mmH FILTER RESONANCE BnH 63H 01H 62H 21H 06H mmH denotes the check sum AEG ATTACK TIME BnH 63H 01H 62H 63H 06H mmH AEG DECAY TIME BnH 63H 01H 62H 64H 06H mmH ddH Oddddddd denotes the data value AEG RELEASE BnH 63H 01H 62H 66H 06H mmH DRUM INST CUTOFF FREQ BnH 63H 14H 62H rrH 06H mmH FILTER RESONANCE BnH 63H 15H 62H rrH 06H mmH AEG ATTACK RATE BnH 63H 16H 62H rrH 06H mmH AEG DECAY RATE BnH 63H 17H 62H rrH 06H mmH PITCH COARSE BnH 63H 18H 62H rrH 06H mmH MIDI Data Format PITCH FINE LEVEL PANPOT REVERB SEND CHORUS SEND BnH 63H 19H 62H rrH 06H mmH BnH 63H 1 AH 62H rrH 06H mmH BnH 63H ICH 62H rrH 06H mmH BnH 63H 1 DH 62H rrH 06H mmH BnH 63H 1EH 62H rrH 06H mmH VARIATION SEND BnH 63H 1FH 62H rrH 06H mmH RPN LSB BnH 64H RPN MSB BnH 65H PITCH BEND SENS BnH 65H 00H 64H 00H 06H mmH FINE TUNING BnH 65H 00H 64H 01H 06H mmH 26H llH COARSE TUNING BnH 65H 00H 64H 02H 06H mmH NULL BnH 65H 7FH 64H 7FH ALL SOUND OFF BnH 78H 00H RESET ALL CONTROLLERS BnH 79H 00H ALL NOTES OFF BnH 7BH 00H OMNI OFF BnH 7CH 00H OMNI ON BnH 7DH 00H MONO BnH 7EH POLY BnH 7FH PROGRAM CHANGE CnH CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH DnH PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL REALTIME FOH 7FH F7H UNIVERSAL NON
59. A and F buttons to select the Split Point function from within the OVERALL menu The MIDI note number see the bottom of the keyboard corresponding to the current split point will appear to the right of Split Point on the top line of the display MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS 5 PUO RO 4 LP Ls 2 Set As Required Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point The key number of the key you press will appear to the right of SplitPoint on the top line of the display You can also use the and buttons number buttons or data dial to enter the split point key number The lowest key on the keyboard C1 is key number 36 middle C C3 is 60 and the highest key C5 is 96 The split point can be set at any key number from 0 through 127 allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR 730 630 keyboard for MIDI applications ES ES EE Ea 9 SHR NOTE split point key be comes the highest key in the left hand section of the key board The default split point 54 for PSR 730 and 59 for PSR 630 can be instantly recalled by pressing the and buttons at the same time For the relationship between the SPLIT VOICE split point and the AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT split point see page 31 When setting the split point that is the sub men
60. Dial to select the retrigger rule Refining User Styles with Style File Format About the Source Chord When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others see Source Pattern Settings on page 148 the chord notes and scale notes will change depending on the currently selected chord type See page 101 for the information on the chord note and scale note ex Source Chord Root of C CM I Hai J CMe ajg CM7 272 377 CM 7 1 iMai Pe iix CMadd9 Hai 33 n 1 C C S 1 C7 9 raizca33 6 9 raieca1 Caug fs Cm ining ining EI e EI minrl Cm 7 5 rnin b51 Cm 9 minca Cm7 9 Cm 11 Cm7 Emi EI 07 EJ e 5 bi C CmM7 5112 777 CmM7 9 ininMair s Cdim fading Cdim7 din 1 ie E 5 C7sus4 7suz41 C7 5rrbs1 C79 rzc931 7 11 1151 C7 13 rz 1331 co C709 1 513 7 1321 09 rris CM7aug H aijr aus1 ausl C448 1 8 C445 1 5 Csus4 sus4 C14245 142457 Troubleshooting Something not working as it should In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately Before assuming that your PSR 730 630 is faulty
61. Frequency Room Size Compressor Release Time Data Data Value Data Value Data Value Data 8 50 40 2 0k 0 0 1 32 5 1 0 10 9 56 41 2 2k 1 0 3 33 53 1 15 10 63 42 2 5k 2 0 4 34 5 4 2 26 11 70 43 2 8k 3 0 6 35 5 6 3 35 12 80 44 3 2k 4 0 7 36 57 4 45 13 90 45 3 6k 5 0 9 37 59 5 55 14 100 46 4 0k 6 1 0 38 6 1 6 65 15 110 47 4 5k 7 1 2 39 6 2 7 75 16 125 48 5 0k 8 14 40 6 4 8 85 17 140 49 5 6k 9 15 41 6 5 9 100 18 160 50 6 3k 10 17 42 6 7 10 115 19 180 51 7 0k 11 18 43 6 8 11 140 20 200 52 8 0k 12 20 44 7 0 12 170 21 225 53 9 0k 13 2 1 13 230 22 250 54 10 0 14 23 14 340 23 280 55 11 0k 15 25 15 680 24 315 56 12 0k 16 2 6 25 355 57 14 0k 17 28 26 400 58 16 0k 18 29 27 450 59 18 0k 19 3 1 28 500 60 THRU 20 0k 20 3 2 29 560 21 34 Table 10 30 630 22 85 Compressor Ratio 31 700 23 3 7 Data 32 800 24 3 9 0 1 0 33 900 25 4 0 1 15 34 1 0k 26 42 2 20 35 1 1k 27 43 3 3 0 36 1 2k 28 45 4 5 0 37 14k 29 46 5 7 0 38 1 6k 30 48 6 10 0 39 1 8k 31 5 0 T 20 0 MIDI Implementation Chart Portable Keyboard Model PSR 730 Function MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Recognized Date 14 APR 1997 Version 1 0 Remarks Basic Default Channel Changed Default Messages Altered 3 X Akk k kkk kkk Note Number True voice 0 127 Kk kkk kkk kkk kk k 0 127 0 127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF O 9nH v 1 127 X 9nH v0
62. L 50 D2 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 51 D 2 s lt S Hand Cym Closed L 52 E2 lt lt FL Key Click Engine Start 53 F2 lt lt lt g Tire Screech 54 F 2 lt lt lt lt Car Passing 55 G2 lt lt lt lt Crash 56 G 2 Analog Cowbell lt lt lt Siren 57 A2 lt lt lt Hand Cym Open H Train 58 A 2 lt lt Jetplane 59 B2 lt Hand Cym Closed H Starship 60 C3 lt lt lt lt Burst Noise 61 C 3 lt lt lt Coaster 62 D3 Analog Conga H lt lt z SvMarine 63 D S Analog Conga M lt lt 64 E3 Analog Conga L lt lt lt 65 g lt lt 66 F 3 lt lt lt lt 67 G3 lt lt lt 68 GS lt lt lt lt Laughing 69 lt lt lt lt Thunder Screaming 70 Analog Maracas lt E Wind Punch 71 B3 lt lt lt lt Stream Heartbeat 72 C4 lt lt lt lt Bubble Footsteps 73 C 4 lt lt lt Feed 74 D4 lt lt lt 75 D 4 Analog Claves lt lt 76 4 lt lt lt lt 77 F4 lt lt lt i 78 F 4 Scratch Push lt lt lt 79 G4 Scratch Pull lt lt lt 80 Gi4 22 lt lt lt 81 A4 22 lt lt lt
63. List No Type Description 1 Duet This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the melody line 2 Trio This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice 3 4Part Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four note chord 4 4 Part Jazz Similar to the preceding type but depending on the chords played this type will sometimes produce a more colorful sound 5 Country Similar to Duet but the second voice is above the melody line 6 Octave One note is added an octave below the melody T Tremolo The note s pressed and held is are repeatedly played at the preset tempo 8 Tremolo Duet Combination of Tremolo and Duet produces a duophonic melody with two voices played alternately 9 Tremolo Octave Combination of Tremolo and Octave produces a duophonic melody with two voices played alternately the second voice is an octave below the melody 10 Strumming This type adds arpeggiated pattern to the melody 11 Trio Delay Two notes slightly below the melody are added to create three parts Additional notes are delayed slightly 12 Vibraphone amp Jazz Guitar Two voices Vibraphone and Jazz Guitar below the melody are added to create three parts 13 Trumpet amp Sax Two voices Trumpet and Saxophone below the melody are added to create three parts 14 Back Vocal Vocal voice is added to the melody to get a vocal part in the background 15 Strings
64. NO EFFECT 072 PHASER 1 073 086 EFFECT 087 ENSEMBLE DETUNE 088 127 EFFECT DSP VARIATIOM EFFECT TYPE TYPE LsB jo ot o2 fog 000 NOEFFECT 2 004 ROOM Roomz 006 piSDELAYLR 09 ER 010 GATE REVERB 011 5 016 018 CANYON 019 BASEMENT 020 KARAOKE KARAOKE2 THRU 13 CELESTE 12 CHORUS3 FLANGER 1 FLANGER TREMOL AUTO PAN 24 PHASER DISTORTION AUTO WAH THRU 1 f CHORUS FLANGER PHASER AUTO WAH AUTO WAH DIST OVERDRIVE THRU TOUCH WAH 1 TOUCH WAH IS OVERDRIVE 086 087 088 THRU PITCH CHANGE PITCH CHANGE THRU TOUCH WAH 2 MULTI EFFECT INSERTION TYPE TYPE LsB Msg fo 3 07 Jog o0 THRU oot hai fha 2 ROOM 00 2 Rooms 06 DELAYLR 069 ROTARY SPEAKER 1 079 081 CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4 FLANGER 3 TOUCH WAH 2 COMPRESSOR NOISE GATE MIDI Data Format 6 0 m a aa 21 3 HALL3 HALL HALL ROOM ROOM STAGE gSTAGES PLATE PLATE 7IDELAY LCR a a FAST SLOW 4FLANGER FLANGER 15 SYMPHONIC Rotary Sp 21 TREMOLO Rotary So 16 AUTO Rotary So Rotary Sp Gtr Tremolo DIST HARD DIS
65. Sensitivity Master Tuning Scale Tuning Song Transpose Metronome Split Voice Split Point Accompaniment Split Point FINGER Voice Set Pedal 1 2 Digital Effect Reverb 13 types Chorus 10 types DSP system insertion 46 types Multi Effect 42 types x 2 Digital Equalizer 5 types 1 User Setting Harmony 16 types Registration Memory 32 Regist Bank 1 4 Naming Accompaniment Freeze Multi Pads 36 Multi Pad Sets 4 Pads STOP Chord Match Naming Disk Song Recording Playback Format Save Load Disk Copy Song Copy Delete File Song Song Volume Minus One Practice Repeat Play Song Repeat Next Song Song Recording Quick Record Multi Record Recording Tracks Quick Record ACCOMPANIMENT MELODY 1 4 Multi Record 1 16 Punch In Punch Out Quantize Naming Song Clear Track Clear Song Edit Voice Volume Octave Pan Reverb Depth Chorus Depth DSP Depth Style Recording User Style 4 101 104 Recording Tracks 5 Sections x 8 tracks Drum Cancel Quantize Naming Track Clear All Clear Multi Pad Recording User Pad Set 4 101 104 Naming Pad Clear Bank Clear MIDI Transmit Settings Receive Settings Local Control Clock Initial Data Send MIDI Template Auxiliary Jacks DC IN 10 12V PHONES SUSTAIN FOOT VOL AUX OUT R L R L MIDI IN OUT TO HOST Amplifiers 6W 6W when using PA 6 power adaptor
66. Shanai 693 678 64 0 85 Train 632 617 0 64 111 Shanai2 694 679 64 0 86 Jetplane 633 6181 0 96 111 Pungi 695 680 64 0 87 Starship 634 619 0 97 111 Hichriki 696 681 64 0 88 Burst Percussive 697 682 64 0 89 Coaster 635 620 0 0 112 TnklBell 698 683 64 0 90 SbMarine 636 621 0 96 112 Bonang 699 684 64 0 96 Laughing 637 622 0 97 112 Gender 700 685 64 0 97 Scream 638 623 0 98 112 Gamelan 701 686 64 0 98 Punch 639 624 0 99 112 S Gamlan 702 687 64 0 99 Heart 640 625 0 100 112 703 688 64 0 100 FootStep 641 626 0 101 112 AsianBel 704 689 64 0 112 MchinGun 642 627 0 0 113 Agogo 705 690 64 0 113 LaserGun 643 628 0 0 114 SteelDrm 706 691 64 0 114 Xplosion 644 629 0 97 114 GlasPerc 707 692 64 0 115 FireWork 645 630 0 98 114 ThaiBell 646 631 0 0 115 WoodBlok 647 632 0 96 115 Castanet 648 633 0 0 116 TaikoDrm 649 634 0 96 116 Gr Cassa 650 635 0 0 117 MelodTom 651 636 0 64 117 Mel Tom2 652 637 0 65 117 Real Tom 653 638 0 66 117 Rock Tom 654 639 0 0 118 Syn Drum 655 640 0 64 118 Ana Tom 656 641 0 65 118 ElecPerc 657 642 0 0 119 RevCymbl Sound Effects 658 643 0 0 120 FretNoiz Voice List B Drum Kit L
67. Shape1 EQ Gain2 EQ Frequency2 EQ Q2 Not Used EQ Gain3 EQ Frequency3 EQ Q3 Not Used EQ Gain4 EQ Frequency4 EQ Q4 Not Used EQ Gain5 EQ Frequency5 EQ Q5 EQ Shape5 Description Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List 61 0 96 127 L63 C R63 1 64 127 61 0 96 127 61 0 96 127 O insertion 1 system part1 32 0 31 0ff 127 63 63 63 63 63 63 option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter option Parameter Description 0 FLAT 1 JAZZ 2 POPS 3 ROCK 4 CLASSIC 12 12 4 32 2000 Hz 0 1 12 0 00 Shelving 01 Peaking 12 12 dB 0 1 10 KHz 0 1 12 0 12 412 dB 0 1 10 KHz 0 1 12 0 12 12 dB 0 1 10 KHz 0 1 12 0 12 12 dB 0 5 16 0 KHz 0 1 12 0 00 Shelving 01 Peaking lt Table 1 6 gt MIDI Parameter change table Effect2 PSR 730 ONLY Address H 03 On 00 02 03 04 05 06 07 H N Bee eee Size H 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TF TF TE 7 TE 7 Data Insertion Type MSB Insertion Type LSB Insertion Parameterl Insertion Pa
68. XG DISK Appears when a floppy disk song is selected Appears when one of the PSR 730 page 76 630 s XG voices is selected page 16 Appears when voices used in a floppy disk song 1 0 260 ONE TOUCH t SETTING 448 DSP HARMONY FINGERING EBEBEBEB LMN MULTI PAD ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK ACCOMPANIMENT TRACKS These icons display the on off status and volume velocity settings Ju 300 222 4250 wt 1224 12 Coi 21 ICE Co for each of the 8 accompaniment tracks They are also used to TTI RII BASS CHORD CHORI PORES specify tracks when using the REVOICE function page 110 When n n o o z o Rs o 2 25 2 m PHRASE s doing Multi recording playback of songs the on off status and volume settings are shown for tracks 1 8 page 89 ei MELODY TRACKS 1 4 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK In Song Quick Record mode the recording track is indicated page 86 When doing Multi recording playback of songs the on off status and volume settings are shown for tracks 9 13 page 89 4 RE z ell z 9 8 m BS b Basic Display Operation e C3 L jm m e 1 3 ONE TOUCH SETTING EBEBEBES FREEZE EBEBEBES TEMPO Shows th
69. __ON OFF Y 3 Start the Accompaniment There are several ways to start the accompaniment Straight start Press the START STOP button The rhythm will begin playing immediately without bass and chord accompaniment The currently selected MAIN A or B section will play START STOP MAIN AUTO FILL SYNC STOP O START O INTRO OENDING 9 NOTE Just like the voice numbers when se lecting 1 or 2 digit style numbers if you add 0 at the begin ning and enter a 3 digit number it will be immediately recog nized For example to select style number 95 Polka press buttons 0 9 5 in sequence NOTE If AUTO ACCOMPA NIMENT is off not lit only rhythm drums and percussion ac companiment will be produced For information about the accompaniment tracks see page 28 It is possible to select the MAIN A or B sec tion prior to a straight start refer to 7 Select the MAIN A and B Sections as Required below Auto Accompaniment Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN A section Press the INTRO button so that its indicator lights press the MAIN AUTO FILL A button not necessary if its indicator is already flashing then press START STOP MAIN AUTO Em A SYNC STOP START INTRO 7e A OENDING gt Start with an introduction followe
70. and content No 1 Thru No 1 adds no effect as its name implies Push in the template names indicates those templates hasten the timing Heavy indicates the templates delay the timing The suffixes A B and C indicate min med and max respectively Time Signature Indicates the appropriate time signatures for you to use Be sure to match the time signature here to your song Select the Dynamics Template Use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select the Dynamics function from within the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menu The name of the currently selected Dynamics Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the Dynamics Template List below use the buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 17 template types Dynamics Template List The templates in this list strengthen or weaken the notes on a specific timing The stress degree can be determined by changing the Dynamics Rate Name Indicates each template name 1 No 1 adds no effect as its name implies The templates from No 7 to No 17 are programmed to put an emphasis on a specific timing Name Time Signature No Name Time Signature No Name Time Signature Thru s 10 3 PushC 3 18 4 HeavyB 4 2_PushA 2 11 3 3 19 4 4 2 2 12 3 3 20 5 PushA
71. chord is not recog h fl h 7 b 1 b2 3 b7 7 b 7 b Seventh flatted ninth 7 b9 3 5 C7 b9 C7 b9 nized if the 5th is Seventh add flatted thirteenth 7 b13 1 3 5 b6 b7 C7 b13 C7 b13 omitted Seventh ninth 7 9 1 2 3 5 b7 C7 9 C7 9 The AUTO ACCOM Seventh add sharp eleventh 7 11 1 2 3 4 5 7 7 11 7 11 PANIMENT will some 1 2 3 84 5 b7 times not change h l h Seventh add thirteenth 7 13 1 3 5 6 7 C7 13 C7 13 when re ated chords are played in se Seventh sharp ninth 7 9 1 2 3 5 b7 C7 9 C7 9 quence e g some Seventh flatted fifth 75 1 3 b5 b7 C75 C7b5 minor chords followed by the minor seventh Seventh augmented 7aug 1 3 5 7 C7aug C7aug Two note fingerings Seventh suspended fourth 7sus4 1 4 5 7 C7sus4 C7sus4 will produce a chord One plus two plus five 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 based on the previ ously played chord Auto Accompaniment Example for C chords The FINGERED 2 Mode This is essentially the same as the FINGERED 1 mode described above except that the FINGERED 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note of each chord simply the lowest note played in the AUTO ACCOMPANI MENT section of the keyboard is used as the accompaniment bass note T
72. cleared data that would be in tracks 9 16 in the Multi Record mode will be cleared at the same time f Melody tracks that were recorded with Dual Voice are cleared tracks re corded with Multi Record Mode RI R2 parts will be cleared at the same time The tracks recorded by Quick recording can be cleared using the Multi recording Track Clear function and vice versa Demo song tracks cannot be cleared Song Recording Use the TRACK buttons to select the track you want to clear The track bar for the track you selected will light steadily and the track bars for the other tracks will be turned off Quick Record o gt 150502012018 MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY VOICE VOICE VOICE 1 2 3 4 L R2 Ri jy ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 wo A Cc o 2 m x a 1 2 e Multi Record WE gt gt gt P P gt gt gt op 213 331 381 259 434 468 440 11 0216 250 013 213 213 213 213 mm oum oum ou L R2 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 Ri 3 4 5 6 7 Once the desired track has been selected Are You Sure will appear on the display Press the YES button to actually clear the currently selected track While the track is being cleared Now Deleting wi
73. direct sunlight or other sources of heat The acceptable storage temperature range is approximately 4 to 53 C 39 to 127 F Do not store disks in areas subject to extreme dryness or humidity The acceptable relative humidity range is approxi mately 8 to 9095 Donotstore disks in areas contaminated with dust sand smoke etc Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk Avoid getting floppy disks wet particularly with oily or sticky fluids A disk that has been wet with water should be allowed to dry naturally before use Disks contaminated by other fluids can cause damage to the disk drive and should be discarded Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position When changing the label never cover the old label with a new label always remove the old label first Head Cleaning With extended use the read write head of the disk drive will pick up dust and other particles that will eventually cause data errors If this occurs clean the head with a 3 5 inch head cleaning disk available from most computer supply stores Data Backup For maximum data security we strongly recommended that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks These disks should ideally be stored in separate locations This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged Protecting Your Data Write Protect Tab To prevent accidental erasure of important data slide the disk s write protect tab to
74. either button causes a continuous in Cs Yes crease or decrease Pressing the 4 YES or NO buttons also switches between on and off settings For items that have Number Buttons 1 0 YES NO Buttons initial default values pressing the and buttons together at the same time will return the setting to the initial value Dial Like the number buttons 1 0 the dial is used to change settings and values Rotating it to the right clockwise increases the value while rotating it to the left counter clockwise decreases it The dial can also be used to toggle on off settings When the value displayed is a number like a style number press ing and holding either the or button will cause the number to continue to the lowest value after the highest is reached or vice versa 99 100 1 2 2 1 100 99 If the number dis played is a value like a transpose value it will stop changing when the maximum or minimum value is reached Basic Display Operation N There are two modes in the PSR 730 630 Style Mode and Song Mode and normally one of them is selected Pressing the STYLE button selects Style Mode lighting the STYLE icon while pressing the Song button selects Song Mode and lights the SONG icon displaying the current mode Style Mode Pressing t
75. from that measure m t iQ 2 MEASURE ACMP SONG L TRANSPOSE OLUME REGISTRATION MEMORY Yes Gang NOTE While the song vol ume setting appears on the top line of the display the and buttons number but tons or data dial can also be used to set the song volume You can move the measure number for playback back and forth even during the song playback Song Playback Minus one Practice You can turn off mute any of the parts of a song while it is playing then practice playing that part yourself along with the other tracks of the song This is called Minus one playback Choose any one ofthe demo or sample disk songs press one ofthe TRACK buttons 1 16 below the display muting the part you want to play and then try playing yourself 1 Selecting the Song for Minus one Playback To select the song see page 76 2 Select the track for Minus one playback Press one of the TRACK buttons below the display and its number gt E will disappear from the display The track you selected will go OFF and the part will be muted SONG TRACK L ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 3 Select the R1 Voice When you are going to play in place of the muted part set the voice for the part you muted listed under the TRACK Number WB as the voice To select the R1 voice see page page 17 4 START STOP Min
76. in 100 the rate actually applied will be rounded down to nearest 10 For ex ample the rates 1 through 9 result in 0 no effect The rates 29 and 53 result in 20 and 50 respectively When using the Reg istration Memory func tion the result rate will be memorized One Touch Setting The PSR 730 630 s 100 internal styles each have four recommended panel setups that can be instantly selected via the ONE TOUCH SETTING and REGISTRA TION MEMORY 1 4 buttons The One Touch Setting feature automatically sets the following parameters One Touch Setting Parameter List R1 Voice Auto Accompaniment ON Voice number volume octave pan reverb depth chorus depth DSP depth Dual Voice ON OFF Main A B section Accompaniment Track ON Synchro start ON R2 Voice Voice number volume octave reverb depth Accompaniment volume 100 chorus depth DSP depth Harmony ON OFF type volume Split Voice ON OFF Reverb ON OFF Boom Chorus ON OFF oice number volume octave pan reverb depth Tr chorus depth DSP depth P P DSP ON OFF type variation ON OFF Split Point Split Voice 54 M Pad Set number Auto Accompaniment 54 Chord Match ON OFF Default Multi Pad1 4 Auto Accompaniment 1 Select a Style Select the STYLE menu and select an accompaniment style as described on page 22 2 Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING Button Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING
77. intend to set the depth at its minimum setting You can also assign other functions to the MODULATION Wheel see below 99 Changing the Modulation Wheel Function It s possible to change the effect that is applied when you rotate the MODULA TION Wheel You can select from 3 types modulation brightness or resonance Modulation Applies vibrato effects to the voices from the keyboard Brightness Adjusts the brightness ofthe R1 voice played on the keyboard Increasing the depth makes the sound brighter while decreas ing it makes it softer Resonance Adds resonance to the R1 voices played on the keyboard Use the MENU VW and A buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to OVERALL Then use the SUB MENU WV and A buttons to select ModWheel The effect currently set for the modulation wheel will appear to the right of the top line of the display Referring to the information above use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 3 effects Transpose This functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR 730 630 to be transposed up or down by a maximum of one octave in semitone increments Setting Transposition Use the TRANSPOSE W and A buttons to set the desired degree of transposi tion Press either button briefly to decrement or increment by one or hold for continuous decrementing or incrementing The c
78. left The menu icon q will move to indicate the menu you have selected SUB MENU 8 8 NE TOUCH i o eoo i00 5 won o WLI fy es Lm TmsPOSE VOLUME REGISTRATION MEMORY MULTI PAD 00 E e 24 9 D s T FFE T REVERB CHORUS 8 8 Im 8 E REGIST MEMORY GROOVE amp DYNAMICS MIDI WP 5 gt gt 5 5 gt gt 45 soos G TAL 081 OOI OGI 001 001 GOI 001 OOI DO DG 001 GOI DO 001 001 RB oL B B LR LL mN EE E EE ES ES EOM OE OW OVERALL amp dass chomo cron PHAGE PHRASE MELODY NELODY MELODY AGW VOCE VOICE VOCE BBREFHRHWNLS A SD w Lf ELA poe sos STYLE ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 R1 SUB MENU Selection SUB MENU A V Buttons You can select one of the sub menus within the selected menu by pressing the A W SUB MENU buttons at the upper left of the display At the top of the display the MENU SUB MENU you selected will displayed on the left and the current setting or value for that item on the right ann Cos Gs The number buttons 1 0 are used to change cam settings values Pressing the button increases the dis C Y a played value by 1 Pressing the button decreases it by 1 Pressing and holding
79. line of the display to the right will appear on the of the parameter s current value Use the and buttons the number buttons top line of the display if or the data dial to set the parameter s value as required Refer to the Revoice ee an accampar ment track which contains Parameters chart on page 110 no data for revoicing and revoicing will not be pos sible Minus settings for the Oc tave and Pan parameters can be directly entered by pressing the appropriate number button while hold ing the button When a voice especially bass voices used for a Style is changed from the XG Voice to the Panel Voice using the Revoice function the octave played for the voice may change 5 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done Repeat steps 2 and 4 above to revoice the tracks as required then press the NOTE REVOICE button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE mode The REVOICE mode will automatically be exited if the MENU A and V buttons are used to select any of the menus to the left of the display Save any revoice settings REVOICE you want to keep to the PSR 730 630 REGISTRA TION MEMORY page 57 The revoice setting are temporary and will be lost if the power is turned off a different style is se lected or a REGISTRA TION MEMORY is re called Overall Functions Some of the functions in the OVERALL function group have already been described in appro
80. of a 2HD disk will be 1 Mbyte and of a 2DD disk will be 720 Kbyte If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk in serted into the disk drive will be displayed at the top of the display and disk operations won t be possible Although all User Style 101 104 User Pad bank 37 40 and Registration Memory bank 01 32 data can be saved gathered into one single file the data can be recalled indi vidually when loaded back into the PSR 730 630 Disk Operations 4 Save File Confirmation Use the SUB MENU button so that Save File appears on the display showing the new file the data will be saved to To overwrite the data already saved to an existing file use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you want to overwrite 5 If Necessary Change the File Name Use the SUB MENU F button so that Rename appears on the display and you can change the name of the file the 8 characters before the extension Even younnase a file where data is al ready saved because you want to overwrite the data renaming the file will cause the new data to be saved in a different file and the old data won t be overwritten While data is being saved Now Saving is displayed never eject the floppy disk or turn off power to the PSR 730 630 Execute the File Save Use the SUB MENU W button so that Execute NO Y
81. of the reverb and chorus at the output for their signals Using MIDI the panning position for the effect can be set page 158 If a Send Chorus to Reverb page 158 signal is transmitted to the PSR 730 630 from an external MIDI device a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb connected in series The signal will enter DSP with the Dry Wet Depth that is set and a signal with the effect applied will be output The DSP Dry Wet Depth are set for only R1 voice with the revoice mode The DSP return level cannot be set The bold lines are stereo lines Effect 1 is valid for Effect 2 is valid for Variation is valid for only one part only one part only one part Effect 1 part Effect 2 part variation part Dry Wet i Dry We DSP Dry Wet Depth EFFI JEFF ie reverb reverb R1 Voice 5 pan return Effecti1 on off Effect 2 on off REVERB Dry Wet Dry Wel i EFF1 E R2 Voice Fett on off Effect on send chorus to reverb Dry Wet ie EFF1 L Voice Effect on off Effect 2 on off CHORUS All tracks that can chorus chorus be revoiced pan return Dry Wet Dry Wet DSP Dry Wet Depth Digital annel 4 l Effectit on off Effect 2 on off DSP on off Chann
82. off when a pair of head phones is plugged into the PHONES jack Do not listen with the headphones at high vol ume for long periods of time Doing so may cause hearing loss The sustain function causes the sound from a depressed key to continue even after the key is released Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into the sustain jack and use it to switch sustain on and off The footswitch con nected to this jack can also be set to replicate the functions of some panel buttons doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment page 117 Connecting an optional Yamaha FC7 foot con troller lets you use your foot to change the volume as you play the PSR 730 630 expres sion function The foot controller connected to this jack can also be set to replicate the functions ofthe main volume controls such as accompani ment or song volume page 117 AUX OUT and L L R Jacks e AUX OUT sss R UL R Stereo System The rear panel AUX OUT R and L L R jacks deliver the output of the PSR 730 630 for con nection to a keyboard amplifier stereo sound system a mixing console or tape recorder If you will be connecting the PSR 730 630 to a monaural sound system use only the L L R jack When a plugis inserted into the L L R jack only the left and right channel signals are com bined and delivered via the L L R jack so you don t lose any of the PSR 730 630 sound Use phone plugs Bl MIDI IN OUT and TO HOST Co
83. outlet cleaning the nstrume e a sott ary SE pR thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument or during Also do not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument since this electrical storms might discolor the panel or keyboard Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the Do not rest your weight on or place heavy objects on the instrument polarity markings Failure to do so might result in overheating fire or and do not use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors battery fluid leakage Use only the stand specified for the instrument When attaching the Always replace all batteries at the same time Do not use new batteries stand use the provided screws only Failure to do so could cause dam together with old ones Also do not mix battery types such as alkaline age to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over batteries with manganese batteries or batteries from different makers or different types of batteries from the same maker since this can cause overheating fire or battery fluid leakage Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing oss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a Do not dispose of batteries in fire physician
84. quantize page 88 or in the Rehearsal Mode use the SUB MENU A and buttons so that Quantize YES appears on the display 2 Press the YES button and Quantize will be displayed with the value at the upper right of the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the Quantize value 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 Set the Quantize value to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are working with For example if the data was recorded with quarter notes and eighth notes use 1 8 for the quantize value If the quantize function is applied in this case with the value setto 1 4 the eighth notes would be moved on top ofthe quarter notes Quantize Value Note Quarrmote Jj si 6 Quarter note triplet 8 Eighth note After quantization 12 Eighth note triplet Jj S SR KO SD Sixteenth note 24 Sixteenth note triplet 32 Thirty second note 3 After making the setting in step 2 use the SUB MENU F button so that Execute No Yes appears on the display Pressing the YES button to execute the quantize function Press the NO button and the quantize function won t execute The display will return to Quantize 4 When Quantize is finished the display will return to Quantize YES NOTE Quantize setting is available only when Multi record ready mode is engaged When in the Quick record
85. ready mode Quantize ap pears on the display and Quantize setting is not accessible One measure of 8th notes before quantization Song Recording Naming User Songs You can give your own name 8 characters or less to user songs In the Record Ready Mode pages 84 88 for the song you want to name or in the Rehearsal Mode use the SUB MENU A and W buttons so that Song Name appears on the display The current name for the song will be displayed at the upper right of the display The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming page 58 Clearing Song Data You can clear unneeded song data in two different ways Clearing Selected Tracks or Clearing an Entire Song In either Quick Record or Multi Record Mode this operation is done in Record Ready Mode or in Rehearsal Mode Clearing Selected Tracks While the Song record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the Track Clear function The track bars for tracks which contain data will flash showing that those tracks can be cleared Quick Record ea na To na uo To 5 ELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 mw p e Multi Record b 8 NOTE e When in Quick Record Mode Clear Selected Track will clear data as follows If the ACMP track is
86. seconds the name of the currently selected DSP effect will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the DSP Type List on page 145 use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired DSP effect from 1 46 For each DSP type there is a variation Pressing the DSP VARIATION button will cause the VARIATION icon to display and the variation type will be applied DSP VARIATION REVERB chorus BRE DSP Return Level The DSP Return DSP Return Level parameter sets the amount of DSP effect returned from the DSP effect stage thus making it possible to adjust the degree of DSP effect applied to the overall sound Use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT then use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select DSP Return the current return level value appears to the right of DSP Return on the display Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to set the desired DSP return level The range is from 0 to 127 The higher the value the greater the return level NOTE If DSP Insertion Effect is selected page 145 you won t be able to set the DSP Return Level In this case will be shown on the display When the Voice Set function is ON page 116 selecting the panel voice for the R1 voice will reset the DSP Return le
87. semitone when changing from a minor chord to a major chord It doesn t change any other notes M m Only H When changing from a major chord to a minor chord this flattens both the third and the sixth by a semitone When changing from a minor chord to a major it raises the flatted third and sixth by a semitone It doesn t change any other notes After finishing recording with the recorded track selected select NTT from the sub menu and use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the transposition table PEE poe A om Other Settings Highest Key setting Set the highest key upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing for the Source Chord Root setting 1 The notes designated higher than the highest key will actually be played back in the octave just below the highest key This setting is effective only when you select the Root Transposition Rule from the item 3 Example When highest key is Root change CM C M DM FM F M Notes played C3 E3 G3 C 3 F3 G 3 D3 F 3 A3 F3 A3 C4 FR2 A 2 C 3 After finishing recording with the recorded track selected select HighestKey from the submenu and use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the highest key EN Ry ies it Refining User Styles with Style File Format 8 Note range Low Limit High Limit settings Set the note range low and high limits for the voices recorded on user style tr
88. set tempo MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button is pressed You can even play two three or four MULTI PADs at the same time Also you can create retriggered sample effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its contents are completely played back MULTI PAD MULTI PAD The MULTI PAD voices are indepedent from the voices you have currently selected for keyboard performance You could for example play piano on the keyboard while a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab When the CHORD MATCH function page 63 for a pad is turned on the corresponding phrase will be automatically transposed to match chords played using the PSR 730 630 Auto accompaniment feature MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PAD STOP button MULTI PAD The Multi Pad Sets Pressing the pad dur ing its playback will stop playing and be gin playing from the top again Chord Match Chord Match Set Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Set Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 1 Fanfare1 O O O 19 Classic O O O O 2 Fanfare2 O O O 20 Jingle O O O O 3 Brassy1 O O O O 21 Horror SE 4 Brassy2 O O O O 22 Racing SE 5 Synth Brass O O O O 23 Stormy SE 6 Guitar Play1 O O O O 24 Water SE 7 Guitar Play2 O O O O 25 Animal SE 8 Guitar Play3 O O O O 26 Haha SE 9 Guitar Play4 O O
89. sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Nie derlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser 4 Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S A De C V Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No 1149 Col Gpe Del Moral Deleg Iztapalapa 09300 Mexico D F Tel 686 00 33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA Av Rebou as 2636 S o Paulo Brasil Tel 011 853 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S A Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH SiemensstraDe 22
90. that the triangular NOTE D indicator in the display appears next to DISK to the left of the display Use the SUB MENU A and buttons so that Song Copy YES appears on the display 3 Select the Source Song File to Be Copied Press the YES button and the file select screen File Name will appear on the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the song file you wish to copy 4 Confirm the Name of the Destination Song File to Copy Use the SUB MENU button so that Copy File appears on the display showing the name that will be given to the new song file being made To overwrite an already recorded song use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you want to overwrite Use the SUB MENU V button so that Rename appears on the display and you can change the name of the file 8 characters before the extension 5 Execute the Copy Operation After changing the file name or when you don t want to change the name use the SUB MENU button so that Execute NO YES appears on the display Press the YES button and the save operation will begin While itis in progress Now Copying will appear at the top of the display When the copy operation is finished the sub menu will return to Song Copy YES If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk in serted int
91. the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compli ance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment gener ates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Oran
92. time In such cases the last track you select is designated for the R1 part recording NOTE When you insert an com mercially available song disk and try to record and overwrite one of the song files which is not write protected Convert NO YES will appear and the recording will not be initi ated If you select YES to execute recording Don t remove the disk appears and the PSR 730 630 starts converting the selected song s format to the PortaTone s After completing the conver sion Record ready mode is engaged to indicate re cording becomes pos sible If you begin recording without selecting the record method Quick Record Mode will auto matically be selected Song Recording Press the TRACK button to select one of the tracks 1 16 for recording For example if you press the Track button below the track 1 the track 1 bar will light showing that the track is selected for recording If you press the same TRACK button once again the track bar will go out and that track will not be recorded pa pq VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 B mA ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 R1 x At this time the part to be recorded for that track will be shown at the top of the display As needed use the and buttons or the Data Dial to change the part Track Default Part Other Parts that Can Be Set 1 R1 R2 L 2 R2
93. track then carefully edit WP gt lt gt gt gt gt gt gt 4 gt gt 1213 331 39 259 434 468 442 471 015 250 213 213 213 213 213 FS L R2 Ri After finishing your recording of a user song you can play it back in the same way as one of the preset demo songs The data you can record in user songs using Quick Recording or Multi Recording are as follows The accompaniment tracks record the following and data Accompaniment style number Accompaniment track changes 8 tracks track on off voice number volume pan reverb depth chorus depth Section changes and their timing The keyboard R1 R2 L tracks record the following and data Note on off key press and release Velocity strength of key press e R1 R2 L voice number volume octave pan reverb depth chorus depth DSP depth Reverb on off and type Chorus on off and type DSP including variation on off and type Chord changes and their timing Accompaniment volume Reverb type Chorus type Tempo and time signature Multi effect on off type and set tings PSR 730 Harmony on off type Sustain pedal on off Pitch bend pitch bend range Tempo The maximum amount of song memory is 65 000 notes for 2DD disks and 130 000 notes for 2HD
94. turned OFF muted or ON by pressing the 112 TRACK buttons corresponding to the target tracks The track icon will disappear when a track is muted By turning the tracks OFF and ON in different combinations you can create various arrangements from a single accompaniment style What s in the Tracks RHYTHM 1 amp 2 These are the main rhythm tracks The RHYTHM tracks produce the drum and percussion sounds To Du uo c3 uu ni uu To E ae c3 J uo Tu E uo Bri BASS E 8 9 5 3 5 2 5 2 2 E i E amp q ezl kS The BASS track always plays a bass line but the voice will change to fit the selected style acoustic bass synth bass tuba etc ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK CHORD 1 amp 2 These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accom paniment required by each style You ll find guitar piano and other chordal instruments here PAD C 4 This track plays long chords where necessary using sustained instruments such as strings organ choir PHRASE 1 amp 2 This is where the musical embellishments reside The PHRASE tracks are used for punchy brass stabs arpeggiated chords and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting The Synchro Stop Function When the Synchro Stop function is engaged accompaniment playback will stop wm completely when all keys in the auto accompaniment sectio
95. voice number Press briefly to increment by one or hold for continuous incrementing VOICE 3 Play amp Adjust Volume You can now play the selected voice on the PSR 730 630 keyboard Use the wr MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the overall volume level When a XG voice is If the Voice Set function page 116 is turned on whenever a panel voice is selected the XG icon selected appropriate R2 and L voices i e DUAL VOICE and SPLIT VOICE Mis 2 in modes as well as digital effects etc will be automatically selected at the same time Refer to page 133 for MASTER a complete list of the VOLUME panel and XG voices uw Playing the PSR 730 630 Keyboard Percussion When one of the 12 panel DRUM KIT voices are selected you can play different NOTE drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard The drums and percussion The HARMONY effect instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols below the keys page 47 cannot be turned on while a drum kit is selected for the R1 voice and HEN 1 i will automatically be ud turned off if a drum kit is selected while VOICE HARMONY is on The TRANSPOSE pa i The above illustration shows the display of the PSR 730 rameter page 56 has no effect the drum The Drum Kits kit voices PSR 730 PSR 630 Kit Name PSR 730 PSR 630 Kit Name See page
96. voice related parameters whenever an R1 panel voice is selected The parameters that may be set by the VOICE SET feature are listed below This function lets you turn VOICE SET on or off as required Voice Set parameter list R1 Voice Volume pan R2 Voice Voice number volume octave pan reverb depth chorus depth DSP depth Harmony type volume Pitch Bend Range DSP Return Level The parameter below is set whether or not the voice set function is on or off R1 Voice Octave reverb depth chorus depth DSP depth Reverb ON OFF Chorus ON OFF DSP ON OFF variation ON OFF DSP type Multi Effect ON OFF Multi Effect Part setting Multi Effect 1 type Dry Wet Multi Effect 2 type Dry Wet Since the Transpose function page 56 sets the overall trans pose value if it is changed the Song Transpose value will be changed by the same amount at the same time The normal trans pose value 00 can be recalled by simul taneously pressing the and but tons Minus values can be entered by using the number buttons while holding the button The Song Transpose value is automatically set to 00 when the user song record mode is engaged The Voice Set func tion is on by default when the power is ini tially turned on Pedal Overall Functions The various functions can be assigned to the Pedals 1 2 the footsw
97. volume L VOLUME Controls the L voice volume ACMP SONG VOLUME Controls the accompaniment song volume in the same way as the ACMP SONG VOLUME V and A buttons HARMONY VOLUME Controls the harmony volume BRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness of the R1 voice RESONANCE Controls the resonance of the R1 voice Polarity Change Normal Reverse You can change the polarity of PEDAL 1 2 foot switch foot controller For example when you are controlling volume with the foot controller you can set whether it increases or decreases when you step on the pedal MIDI Functions In the rear panel of your PSR 730 630 there are MIDI terminals MIDI IN MIDI OUT a TO HOST terminal and a HOST SELECT switch By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical possibilities This section explains what MIDI is and what it can do as well as how you can use MIDI on your PSR 730 630 What s MIDI No doubt you have heard the terms acoustic instrument and digital instrument In the world today these are the two main categories of instruments Let s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments They are easy to understand With the piano you strike a key and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note With the guitar you directly pluck a string and the note sounds But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note Acoustic gu
98. 0 16 FI KClik 609 594 0 67 102 Creation 670 655 64 0 32 Rain 610 595 0 68 102 Stardust 671 656 64 0 33 Thunder 611 596 0 69 102 Reso Pan 672 657 64 0 34 Wind 612 597 0 0 103 Sci Fi 673 658 64 0 35 Stream 613 598 0 64 103 Starz 674 659 64 0 36 Bubble Ethnic 675 660 64 0 37 Feed 614 599 0 0 104 Sitar 676 661 64 0 48 Dog 615 600 0 32 104 DetSitar 677 662 64 0 49 Horse 616 601 0 35 104 Sitar2 678 663 64 0 50 Bird2 617 602 0 96 104 Tambra 679 664 64 0 54 Ghost 618 603 0 97 104 Tamboura 680 665 64 0 55 Maou 619 604 0 0 105 Banjo 681 666 64 0 64 Tel Dial 620 605 0 28 105 MuteBnjo 682 667 64 0 65 DoorSqek 621 606 0 96 105 Rabab 683 668 64 0 66 Door Slam 622 607 0 97 105 Gopichnt 684 669 64 0 67 Scratch 623 608 0 98 105 Oud 685 670 64 0 68 Scratch 2 624 609 0 0 106 Shamisen 686 671 64 0 69 WindChm 625 610 0 0 107 Koto 687 672 64 0 70 Telphon2 626 611 0 96 107 T Koto 688 673 64 0 80 CarEngin 627 612 0 97 107 Kanoon 689 674 64 0 81 Car Stop 628 613 0 0 108 Kalimba 690 675 64 0 82 Car Pass 629 614 0 0 109 Bagpipe 691 676 64 0 83 CarCrash 630 615 0 0 110 Fiddle 692 677 64 0 84 Siren 631 616 0 0 111
99. 0 variation block 10 120 5 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 14 6 Lch Delay2 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 15 Input Mode mono stereo 0 1 1 371 4ms insertion block 1 3714 16 7 Rch Delay2 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 1 371 4ms insertion block 1 3714 FLANGER 1 2 3 chorus variation insertion block Delay Level 0 127 0 127 No Parameter Value See Table Control 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 1 mE 39 7Hz 0 1 a table 1 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 n 4 Delay Offset 0 127 0 127 table 2 5 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 idi 14 EQ Low Gain 121208 52 76 7 EQlowGan sare 20909 197 Bai igh Frequency poole 16 08 28250 debiera 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 16 EQ High Gain 12 412dB 52 76 9 EQ High Gain 21208 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz variation block 14 54 table 3 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB variation block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 variation block 10 120 14 LFO Phase Difference 180 180deg resolution 3deg 4 124 15 16 SYMPHONIC chorus variation insertion block MIDI Data Format TREMOLO variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 3 Delay Offset 0 127 0 127 table 2 4 5 6 EQLow Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7
100. 0 127 3 4 5 6 EQLow Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz variation block 14 54 table 3 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB variation block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 variation block 10 120 14 15 16 2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed 0 0 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 e 2 Drive Low 0 127 0 127 3 Drive High 0 127 0 127 4 Low High L63 gt H L H L lt H63 1 127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 12 Mic L R Angle Odeg 180deg resolution 3deg 0 60 No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 e 2 AM Depth 0 127 0 127 3 PM Depth 0 127 0 127 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 11 EQ Mid Frequency 10092 10 0 2 variation block 14 54 table 3 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB variation block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 variation block 10 120 14 LFO Phase
101. 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH 22 34 25462 Rellingen of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen F R of Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 ASIA HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 4131 31 Neung Dong Sungdong Ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 466 0021 5 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd 16 28 Jalan SS 2 72 Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 717 8977 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd BIk 202 Hougang Street 21 402 01 Singapore 530202 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yam
102. 1 1 0 1 10 14 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 15 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 16 16 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 WHITE ROOM TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT reverb variation block EARLY REF1 EARLY REF2 variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Reverb Time 0 3 30 05 0 69 table 4 1 Type S H L H Rdm Rvs Plt Spr 0 5 2 Diffusion 0 10 0 10 2 Room Size 0 1 7 0 0 44 table 6 3 Initial Delay 0 63 0 63 table 5 3 Diffusion 0 10 0 10 4 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 4 Initial Delay 0 63 0 63 table 5 5 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 6 Width 0 5 10 2m 0 37 table 11 6 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 7 Heigt 0 5 20 2m 0 73 table 11 7 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 8 Depth 0 5 30 2m 0 104 table 11 8 9 Wall Vary 0 30 0 30 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 11 Rev Delay 0 63 0 63 table 5 11 Liveness 0 10 0 10 12 Density 0 4 0 4 12 Density 0 3 0 3 13 Er Rev Balance E63 gt R E R E lt R63 1 127 13 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 14 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 14 15 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 15 16 16 DELAY L C R variation insertion block GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Lch Delay 0 1 1486 0ms variation bloc
103. 10000 30 Sub ID 00000000 00 00000000 00 mmmmmmm MM Master Tune MSB LL Master Tune LSB cc don t care 11110111 B7 End of Exclusive Changes tuning of all channels MM LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value T M 128 T Tuning value 99cent 99cent Asingle byte value 28 228 consists of bytes 0 3 of MM MSB bytes 0 3 of LL LSB In this setting GM System ON XG System ON will not be reset Parameter note number 13 note number 14 note number 91 Data H 0000 O7FF 00 7F 28 58 00 00 Prameter Name Master Tune Master Volume Not Used Transpose Drum Setup Reset XG System On All Parameter Reset Description 102 4 102 3 cent Ist bit3 0 gt bit15 12 2nd bit3 0 gt bit 11 8 3rd bit3 0 gt bit7 4 4th bit3 0 gt bit3 0 0 127 24 24 semitones n Drum Setup Number 00 XG Sytem on 00 receive only Default Value H 00 04 00 00 0400 With XG GM On it will not reset 40 MIDI Data Format Table 1 3 MIDI Parameter table System information Address Size Data H H H Prameter Name Description Model Name 32 127 ASCIDI 01 00 00 D 20 7F 0 OE OF TOTAL SIZE 10 00 00 Transmitted by Dump Request Not received Bulk Dump Only lt Table 1 4 gt MIDI Parameter Change table EFFECT 1 Address Size Data Prameter Name Description H H H 02 01 00 2 00 7
104. 112 49 ChamberSirs 178 0 112 81 Saw Lead 117 0 116 48 Mellow Orch 179 0 113 81 Big Lead 118 0 112 44 TremoloStrs 180 0 112 98 Stardust 119 0 112 45 PizzStrings 181 0 114 81 Blaster 120 0 112 50 Syn Strings 182 0 115 81 Analogon 121 0 112 51 Analog Strs 183 0 113 80 Vintage Ld 122 0 112 52 Choir 184 0 113 98 Sun Bell 123 0 112 54 Air Choir 185 0 112 83 Aero Lead 124 0 113 52 Vocal Ensbl 186 0 116 81 Fire Wire 125 0 112 53 Vox Humana 187 0 114 80 Mini Lead 126 0 113 53 Gothic Vox 188 0 115 80 Vinylead 127 0 113 54 Voices 189 0 117 81 Warp 128 0 112 55 Orch Hit 190 0 116 80 Hi Bias Solo Brass 191 0 117 80 Meta Wood 129 0 115 56 Sweet Trp 192 0 118 80 Tiny Lead 130 0 112 56 SoloTrumpet 193 0 118 81 Sub Aqua 131 0 114 56 SoftTrumpet 194 0 119 81 Fargo 132 0 113 56 Flugel Horn Synth Pad 133 0 112 59 Muted Trp 195 0 113 94 Insomnia 134 0 112 57 Trombone 196 0 112 90 Krypton 135 0 114 57 MelTrombone 197 0 113 99 Cyber Pad 136 0 112 60 French Horn 198 0 112 95 Wave 2001 137 0 112 58 Tuba 199 0 112 94 Equinox Brass Ensemble 200 0 114 88 Stargate 138 0 112 61 BrasSection 201 0 112 92 DX Pad 139 0 113 61 BigBandBrs 202 0 112 93 Loch Ness 140 0 116 61 MellowBrass 203 0 112 88 Fantasia 141 0 117 61 Small Brass 204 0 115 88 Golden Age 142 0 118 61 Pop Brass 205 0 112 91 Xenon Pad 143 0 119 61 MellowHorns 206 0 112 89 Area 51 144 0 113 59 BallroomBrs 207 0 112 99 Atmosphere 145 0 114 61 Full Horns 208 0 113 89 Dark Moon 146 0 115 61 High Brass 209 0 115 94 lon
105. 16 off D 35 12 12to16B D 12 16B D 11 16 off E 16 off E 36 12 12to16B E 12 16B E 12 16 16108 off 16 8 off 37 24 24108 off 24 8 off 13 16 16to8 A 16 8 A 38 24 2408 A 24 8 14 16 16to8 B 16 8 39 24 2408 B 24 8 15 16 16to8 16 8 40 24 24108 24 8 C 16 16 16to8 D 16 8 D 41 24 2408 D 24 8 D 17 16 16to8 E 16 8 E 42 24 24108 E 24 8 E 18 16 16to12 off 16 12 off 43 24 241016 off 24 16 off 19 12 12t08 off 12 8 off 44 24 241016 A 24 16 20 12 12108 A 12 8 45 24 24016 B 24 16 B 21 12 12t08 B 12 8 B 46 24 241016 C 24 16 C 22 12 12t08 C 12 8 C 47 24 24016 D 24 16 D 23 12 12t08 D 12 8 48 24 241016 E 24 16 24 12 12108 E 12 8 49 24 241012 off 24 12 off 25 12 12t016A off 12 16A off Select the Measure Groove Template Use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the MeasGroove function from within the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menu The name of the currently selected Measure Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the Measure Groove Template List below use the buttons or the Data Dial to select one of the 25 template types Auto Accompaniment Measure Groove Template List The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by measures These templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by hastening or delaying the timing of the first beat of every measure Name Indicates each template name
106. 27 3 0 59 12 0 27 85 1 59 1859 91 286 6 123 387 4 27 75 59 16 2 9t 25 8 28 1 18 60 2 52 92 7 07 124 33 0 28 3 1 60 13 0 28 88 3 60 189 0 92 289 8 124 390 6 28 78 60 16 5 92 26 1 29 1 22 61 2 57 93 7 40 125 34 3 29 3 2 61 140 29 914 61 1922 93 2929 125 393 7 29 8 0 61 16 8 93 26 5 30 1 26 62 2 61 94 7 74 126 37 0 30 3 3 62 15 0 30 94 6 62 1953 94 296 1 126 396 9 30 8 3 62 17 1 94 26 8 31 1 30 63 2 65 95 8 08 127 39 7 31 3 4 63 16 0 31 97 7 63 198 5 95 299 2 127 400 0 31 8 6 63 17 3 95 27 1 Table 2 Table 5 Table 8 Modulation Delay Offset Delay Time 200 0ms Compressor Attack Time Data Data Data Data _ Value Data Data _ Value Data Value Data Data 0 0 0 32 32 64 6 4 96 9 6 0 0 1 32 505 64 100 8 96 1512 0 1 1 0 1 33 3 3 65 6 5 97 9 7 1 17 33 520 65 102 4 97 1528 1 2 2 0 2 34 34 66 6 6 98 9 8 2 3 2 34 53 6 66 104 0 98 1544 2 3 3 0 3 35 3 5 67 6 7 99 9 9 3 48 35 552 67 105 6 99 1559 3 4 4 04 36 3 6 68 6 8 100 10 0 4 6 4 36 56 8 68 107 1 100 157 5 4 5 5 0 5 37 3 7 69 6 9 101 11 1 5 8 0 37 58 3 69 108 7 101 159 1 5 6 6 0 6 38 3 8 70 7 0 102 12 2 6 9 5 38 59 9 70 110 3 102 160 6 6 7 7 0 7 39 3 9 71 23 103 13 3 7 114 39 61 5 71 111 9 103 1622 rj 8 8 0 8 40 4 0 72 72 104 14 4 8 12 7 40 63 1 72 113 4 104 163 8 8 9 9 0 9 41 441 73 73 105 155 9 143 41 646 73 115 0 105 165 4 9 10 10 1 0 42 4 2 74 74 106 17 1 10 15 8 42 66 2 74 116 6 106 166 9 10
107. 287 0 32 17 DetPrcOr 363 348 0 28 34 MutePkBa 303 288 0 33 17 LiteOrg 364 349 0 0 35 Fretless 304 289 0 37 17 PercOrg2 365 350 0 32 35 Fretles2 305 290 0 0 18 RockOrgn 366 351 0 33 35 Fretles3 306 291 0 64 18 RotaryOr 367 352 0 34 35 Fretles4 307 292 0 65 18 SloRotar 368 353 0 96 35 SynFretl 308 293 0 66 18 FstRotar 369 354 0 97 35 Smooth 309 294 0 0 19 ChrchOrg 370 355 0 0 36 SlapBas1 310 295 0 32 19 ChurOrg3 371 356 0 27 36 ResoSlap 311 296 0 35 19 ChurOrg2 372 357 0 32 36 PunchThm 312 297 0 40 19 NotreDam 373 358 0 0 37 SlapBas2 313 298 0 64 19 OrgFlute 374 359 0 43 37 VeloSlap 314 299 0 65 19 TrmOrgFl 375 360 0 0 38 SynBass1 315 300 0 0 20 ReedOrgn 376 361 0 18 38 SynBaiDk 316 301 0 40 20 Puff Org 377 362 0 20 38 FastResB 317 302 0 0 21 Acordion 378 363 0 24 38 AcidBass 318 303 0 32 21 Accordlt 379 364 0 35 38 Clv Bass 319 304 0 0 22 Harmnica 380 365 0 40 38 320 305 0 32 22 Harmo 2 381 366 0 64 38 Oscar 321 306 0 0 23 TangoAcd 382 367 0 65 38 SqrBass 322 307 0 64 23 TngoAcd2 383 368 0 66 38 RubberBa Guitar 384 369 0 96 38 Hammer 3231308 0 0 24 NylonGtr 385 370 0 0 39 Syn
108. 35 64 2 69 96 8 41 0 0 3 32 3 5 64 170 0 0 1 32 100 9 64 201 6 96 3024 0 0 5 32 8 8 64 17 6 96 275 1 0 04 33 1 39 65 2 78 97 8 75 1 0 4 33 3 6 65 18 0 1 32 33 104 0 65 2048 97 305 5 1 0 8 33 9 1 65 17 9 98 28 1 2 0 08 34 1 43 66 2 86 98 9 08 2 0 5 34 3 7 66 190 2 64 34 1072 66 207 9 98 308 7 2 1 0 34 94 66 18 2 99 28 5 3 0 13 35 147 67 2 94 99 9 42 3 0 6 35 3 8 67 200 3 9 5 35 110 3 67 211 1 99 3118 3 1 3 35 9 6 67 18 5 100 28 8 4 0 17 36 1 51 68 3 03 100 9 76 4 0 7 36 3 9 68 250 4 127 36 113 5 68 2142 100 315 0 4 15 36 99 68 18 8 101 29 2 0 21 37 1 56 69 3 11 101 10 1 5 0 8 37 40 69 300 5 15 8 37 1166 69 2174 101 318 1 5 1 8 37 10 2 69 19 1 102 29 5 6 0 25 38 1 60 70 3 20 102 10 8 6 0 9 38 44 6 19 0 38 119 8 70 220 5 102 321 3 6 20 38 104 70 19 4 103 29 9 7 0 29 39 1 64 71 3 28 103 11 4 7 1 0 39 42 7 22 1 39 1229 71 223 7 103 3244 7 23 39 10 7 71 19 7 104 30 2 8 0 34 40 1 68 72 3 37 104 12 1 8 14 40 43 8 253 40 126 1 72 226 8 104 327 6 8 26 40 11 0 72 20 0 9 0 38 41 172 73 3 45 105 12 8 9 12 41 44 9 28 4 41 1292 73 230 0 105 330 7 9 28 41 112 73 20 2 10 0 42 42 1 77 74 3 53 106 13 5 10 1 3 42 45 10 31 6 42 1324 74 233 1 106 333 9 10 3 1 42 115 74 20 5 11 0 46 43 1 81 75 3 62 107 14 1 11 14 43 46 11 347 43 135 5 75 2363 107 337 0 11 33 43 11 8 75 20 8 12 0 51 44 1 85 76 3 70 108 14 8 12 1 5 44 47 12 379 44 138 6 76 239 4 108 3402 12 3 6 44 12 1 76 21 1 13 0 55 45 1 89 77 3 87 109 15 5 13 1 6 45 48 13
109. 410 45 141 8 77 242 6 109 343 3 13 3 9 45 12 3 77 21 4 14 0 59 46 1 94 78 4 04 110 16 2 14 17 46 49 14 442 46 1449 78 245 7 110 346 5 14 44 46 12 6 78 217 15 0 63 47 1 98 79 4 21 111 16 8 15 18 47 5 0 15 473 47 148 1 79 248 9 111 3496 15 44 47 12 9 79 22 0 16 0 67 48 2 02 80 4 37 112 17 5 16 1 9 48 65 16 50 5 48 151 2 80 252 0 112 3528 16 46 48 13 1 80 22 4 id 0 72 49 2 06 81 4 54 113 18 2 17 2 0 49 6 0 17 53 6 49 1544 81 255 2 113 355 9 17 49 49 13 4 81 22 7 18 0 76 50 210 82 471 114 19 5 18 24 50 6 5 18 56 8 50 157 5 82 258 3 114 359 1 18 52 50 13 7 82 23 0 19 0 80 51 215 83 4 88 115 20 9 19 ae 51 7 0 19 59 9 51 160 7 83 261 5 115 3622 19 54 51 14 0 83 23 3 20 0 84 52 2 19 84 5 05 116 22 2 20 2 3 52 75 20 63 1 52 163 8 84 2646 116 365 4 20 57 52 14 2 84 23 6 21 0 88 53 2 23 85 5 22 117 23 6 21 24 53 8 0 21 66 2 53 167 0 85 267 7 117 368 5 21 59 53 145 85 23 9 22 0 93 54 2 27 86 5 38 118 249 22 25 54 8 5 22 69 4 54 170 1 86 270 9 118 371 7 22 6 2 54 14 8 86 24 2 23 0 97 55 2 31 87 5 55 119 26 2 23 26 55 9 0 23 72 5 55 1733 87 2740 119 3748 23 6 5 55 15 1 87 24 5 24 1 01 56 2 36 88 5 72 120 27 6 24 27 56 9 5 24 75 7 56 176 4 88 2772 120 378 0 24 6 7 56 154 88 24 9 25 1 05 57 2 40 89 6 06 121 28 9 25 2 8 57 10 0 25 78 8 57 179 6 89 280 3 121 381 1 25 7 0 57 15 6 89 25 2 26 1 09 58 244 90 6 39 122 30 3 26 29 58 110 26 82 0 58 182 7 90 283 5 122 384 3 26 T 58 15 9 90 25 5 27 1 14 59 2 48 9t 6 73 123 31 6
110. 4W 4W when using batteries Speakers 12cm 4 3 4 2 Power Consumption 24 W when using PA 6 AC power adaptor Batteries Six SUM 1 D size R 20 or equivalent batteries Rated Voltage DC 10 12V Dimensions W x D x H 973 x 397 x155 mm 38 1 4 x 15 5 8 x 6 1 8 Weight 9 5 kg 20 9 Ibs excluding batteries Supplied Accessories Sample Disk Music Stand Owner s Manual Optional Accessories Headphones HPE 150 AC Power Adaptor PA 6 Foot Switch FCA FC5 Foot Volume FC7 e Keyboard Stand L 6 L 7 Specifications subject to change without notice m Index A AC power adaptor 12 Accompaniment styles 22 22 Accompaniment tracks 86 Auto ACCOMPANIMENT 2 22 Auto accompaniment on off 23 Auto ie t eee ce e 27 AUX OUT eA a 13 Bank registration 57 BalletlBs e triente eri ndr Enea 12 Beat Groove atei arie sek 36 Beatiindicator anson cR a De 26 BOOSURaAlO nete iter t Pat sie e 40 Chord Match 2 63 Chord types auto accompaniment 34 GIONS TS 44 GlOCK 128 e 13 To 4 Control Change sees 120
111. 7 e 3 Threshold 48 6dB 79 121 4 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 4 Ratio 1 0 20 0 0 7 table 10 5 5 Output Level 0 127 0 127 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 z 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 9 High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 10 11 Drive 0 127 0 127 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 AUTO WAH DIST AUTO WHA ODRV variation block NOISE GATE variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 1 Attack 1 40ms 0 19 table 8 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 2 Release 10 680ms 0 15 table 9 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 127 0 127 e 3 Threshold 72 30dB 55 97 4 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 4 Output Level 0 127 0 127 5 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 6 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 7 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 8 9 EQ High Gain 12 4 12dB 52 76 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 10 11 Drive 0 127 0 127 11 12 EQ Low Gain distortion 12 12dB 52 76 12 13 EQ Mid Gain distortion 12 12dB 52 76 13 14 LPF Cutoff 1 0kHz thru 34 60 table 3 14 15 Output Level 0 127 0 127 15 16 16 TOUCH WAH 1 variation insertion block TOUCH WAH DIST variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Sensitive 0 127 0 127 2 Cutoff Frequency
112. 76 261 0 64 12 SineMrmb 277 262 0 97 12 Balafon2 278 263 0 98 12 Log Drum 279 264 0 0 13 Xylophon 280 265 0 0 14 TubulBel 281 266 0 96 14 ChrchBel 282 267 0 97 14 Carillon 283 268 0 0 15 Dulcimer 284 269 0 35 15 Dulcimr2 285 270 0 96 15 Cimbalom 286 271 0 97 15 Santur Organ 287 272 0 0 16 DrawOrgn enm ee malas oice Voice i oie Voi i Number Number MSB LSB um Number Number MSB LSB Change 288 273 0 32 16 DetDrwOr 350 335 0 65 31 GtFeedbk 289 274 0 33 16 60sDrOr1 351 336 0 66 31 GtrHrmo2 290 275 0 34 16 60sDrOr2 Bass 291 276 0 35 16 70sDrOr1 352 337 0 0 32 Aco Bass 292 277 0 36 16 DrawOrg2 353 338 0 40 32 JazzRthm 293 278 0 37 16 60sDrOr3 354 339 0 45 32 VXUprght 294 279 0 38 16 EvenBar 355 340 0 0 33 FngrBass 295 280 0 40 16 16 2 2 3 356 341 0 18 33 FingrDrk 296 281 0 64 16 Organ Ba 357 342 0 27 33 FlangeBa 297 282 0 65 16 70sDrOr2 358 343 0 40 33 Ba amp DstEG 298 283 0 66 16 CheezOrg 359 344 0 43 33 FngrSlap 299 284 0 67 16 DrawOrg3 360 345 0 45 33 FngBass2 300 285 0 0 17 PercOrgn 361 346 0 65 33 ModAlem 301 286 0 24 17 70sPcOr1 362 347 0 0 34 302
113. 94 96 97 98 99 100 101 120 121 KXOXXOXXOOOOXXO Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Sound Controller Sound Controller Portamento Controllers Effect Depth RPN Inc Dec NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB All Sound Off Reset All Controllers Program Change True O 0 127 kk kkk kkk System Exclusive System Song Position Song Select Common Tune System Clock Real Time Commands Aux Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Messages Active Sense Reset Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY 123 127 Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes X No MIDI Implementation Chart 1 2 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel See page 125 for more information Incoming MIDI messages control the PSR 730 630 as 16 channel multi timbral tone generator when initially shipped factory set The MIDI messages don t affect the panel controls including the Panel Voice selection since they are directly sent to the tone generator of the PSR 730 630 However the following MIDI messages affects the panel controls such as Panel Voice Style Multi Pad and Song settings MIDI MASTER TUNE MASTER TUNE XG System Param eter TRANSPOSE XG System Parameter System Exclusive Messages relatedto the REVERB CHORUS DSP EFFECT and MULTI EFFECT PSR 730 only se
114. ANNEL AFTER TOUCH Recive only STATUS 1101nnnn DnH 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER VALUE Ovvvvvvv v 0 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE 3 1 5 PITCH BEND CHANGE STATUS 1110nnnn EnH 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER LSB Ovvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB MSB Ovvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB 3 1 6 CONTROL CHANGE STATUS lOlInnnn BnH n 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER CONTROL NUMBER CONTROL VALUE Ovvvvvvv Transmit CONTROL NUMBER c 0 BANK SELECT MSB v 0 XG NORMAL 64 SFX NORMAL 126 XG SFX KIT 127 XG DRUM c 32 BANK SELECT LSB 0 127 3 c DATA ENTRY MSB 1 0 127 1 38 DATA ENTRY LSB 0 127 1 ee MAIN VOLUME 0 127 10 0 127 call EXPRESSION 0 127 64 SUSTAIN v 0 63 64 127 0N 2 c 66 SOSTENUTO v 0 63 0FF 64 127 0N 2 c 67 SOFT PEDAL v 0 63 0FF 64 127 0N 2 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL 0 127 94 VARIATION SEND LEVEL v 0 127 When only Connection 1 System Receive CONTROL NUMBER c 0 BANK SELECT MSB v 0 XG NORMAL 64 SFX NORMAL 126 XG SFX KIT 127 XG DRUM 32 BANK SELECT LSB 0 127 3 c MODULATION 0 127 2 c PORTAMENTO TIME v 20 127 2 6 DATA ENTRY MSB 0 127 38 DATA ENTRY LSB 0 127 1 c 7 MAIN VOLUME v 20 127 c 10 PANPOT 0 127 11 EXPRESSION 0 127 64 SUSTAIN v 0 63 0FF 64 127 0N 65 PORTAMENTO v 0 63 0FF 64 127 0N 9 c 66 SOSTENUTO v 0 63 0FF 64 127 0N 2 c 67 SO
115. Analog Conga L 65 F3 Timbale H 66 Timbale L 67 G3 Agogo H lt 68 Agogo L lt 69 Cabasa lt 70 Analog Maracas 71 B3 Samba Whistle H lt 72 C4 Samba Whistle L lt 73 C 4 Guiro Short lt 74 D4 Guiro Long 75 D 4 Claves Analog Claves 76 E4 Wood Block H 77 F4 Wood Block L lt lt 78 F 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push 79 G4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull 80 G 4 2 Triangle Mute 81 A4 2 Triangle Open 82 4 83 4 Jingle Bell 84 c5 Bell Tree 85 5 86 05 87 D 5 88 E5 89 F5 90 F 5 91 G5 Drum Kit List PSR 730 Voice 222 223 224 225 226 227 PSR 630 Voice 207 208 209 210 211 212 Bank MSB 127 127 127 127 126 126 Bank LSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Changes 27 32 40 48 0 1 Note MIDI Note Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Classic Kit SFX 1 SFX 2 13 1 3 lt lt lt 14 D 1 S lt lt lt 15 0 1 lt lt lt 16 E 1 lt 17 F 1 4 lt lt lt lt 18 Fi 24 lt lt lt lt 19 G 1 lt lt lt i 20 G 1
116. Bass2 3241309 0 16 24 NylonGt2 386 371 0 6 39 MelloSB1 325 310 0 25 24 NylonGt3 387 372 0 12 39 Seq Bass 326 311 0 43 24 VelGtHrm 388 373 0 18 39 ClkSynBa 327 312 0 96 24 Ukulele 389 374 0 19 39 SynBa2Dk 3281313 0 0 25 SteelGtr 390 375 0 32 39 SmthBa2 3291314 0 16 25 SteelGt2 391 376 0 40 39 ModulrBa 330 315 0 35 25 12StrGtr 392 377 0 41 39 DX Bass 331 316 0 40 25 Nyln amp Stl 393 378 0 64 39 X WireBa 332 317 0 41 25 Stl amp Body Strings 333 318 0 96 25 Mandolin 394 379 0 40 Violin 334 319 0 0 26 Jazz Gtr 395 380 0 40 SlowVIn 335 320 0 18 26 MelloGtr 396 381 0 41 Viola 336 321 0 32 26 JazzAmp 397 382 0 42 Cello 337 322 0 0 27 CleanGtr 398 383 0 43 Contrabs 338 323 0 32 27 ChorusGt 399 384 0 44 Trem Str 339 324 0 0 28 Mute Gtr 400 385 0 44 SlowTrStr 340 325 0 40 28 FunkGtr1 401 386 0 44 Susp Str 341 326 0 41 28 MuteStlG 402 387 0 45 Pizz Str 342 327 0 43 28 FunkGtr2 403 388 0 46 Harp 343 328 0 45 28 Jazz Man 404 389 0 46 YangChin 344 329 0 0 29 Ovrarive 405 390 0 47 Timpani 345 330 0 43 29 Gt Pinch Ensembl 346 331 0 0 30 Dist Gtr 406 391 0 0 48 Strings1 347 332 0 40 30 FeedbkGt 407 392 0 3 48 S Strngs 348 333 0
117. Chorus Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 25 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 26 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 27 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 28 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 29 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 2A 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 2B 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 2C 1 00 7F Chorus Return c0 0 6dB 0 96 127 2D 1 01 7 Chorus Pan L63 C R63 1 64 127 2E 1 00 7F Send Chorus To Reverb co 0 6dB 0 96 127 TOTAL SIZE 02 01 30 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 31 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 32 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 33 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 34 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 35 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef Parameter List TOTAL SIZE 6 02 01 40 2 00 7F Variation Type MSB Refer to the Ef Type List 00 7F Variation Type LSB 00 basic type 42 2 00 7F Vari Param 1 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Vari Param 1 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 44 2 00 7F Vari Param 2 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Vari Param 2 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 46 2 00 7F Vari Param 3 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter
118. Difference 180 180deg resolution 3deg 4 124 15 Input Mode mono stereo 0 1 16 AUTO PAN variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 e 2 L R Depth 0 127 0 127 3 F R Depth 0 127 0 127 4 PAN Direction L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Lturn Rturn L R 0 5 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz variation block 14 54 table 3 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB variation block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 variation block 10 120 14 15 16 PHASER 1 chorus variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 3 Phase Shift Offset 0 127 0 127 4 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 11 Stage 4 5 6 chorus insertion block 4 6 4 12 variation block 4 12 12 Diffusion mono stereo 0 1 13 14 15 16 PHASER 2 variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 3 Phase Shift Offset 0 127 0 127 4 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127
119. E and MULTI PAD 1 4 icons will flash indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes bad 6 7 RECORD BEAT ole MULT PAD 1 A 4 RING GROOVE amp DYNAMICS s y s Ag MELODY ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE N L R2 R1 W SONG 3 Select the Style Record Mode Press the STYLE button to select the Style record mode The STYLE menu p will automatically be selected and a user style number will appear on the top line s The icons OP auct whieh of the display The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo already contain data will indicating that the record ready synchro start mode is engaged Also the indicators for the auto accompaniment section buttons INTRO MAIN A MAIN the style record mode is B and ENDING will flash indicating that a section and track must be selected before recording can begin marie sive Modes selected while a preset style is selected a user style which does not con aaa tain any recorded data will k o 34 STYLE automatically be selected Se SoS 5 Elo If all user styles alread 214 219 340 322 304 434 Xy Ecl i nono E eme VOICE VOICE user style number 101 8 AN Mia user style number 1 will 4 be selected y v Y If the style record mode is x i engaged
120. EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz variation block 14 54 table 3 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB variation block 52 76 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 variation block 10 120 14 15 16 ENSEMBLE DETUNE chorus variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Detune 50 50cent 14 114 2 Lch Init Delay 0 127 0 127 table 2 3 Rch Init Delay 0 127 0 127 table 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 variation insertion block 12 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 variation insertion block 13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 variation insertion block 14 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 variation insertion block 15 16 AMBIENCE variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 0 127 0 127 table 2 2 Output Phase normal invers 0 1 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 12 13 14 15 16 ROTARY SPEAKER variation insertion block Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 e 2 LFO Depth 0 127
121. ES appears on the display NOTE f If you press the SUB MENU A button the sub menu display will return to Save To Disk YES If there isn t enough Press the YES button and the save operation will begin While it is in progress iie 2 isk Full will dis Now Saving will appear at the top of the display played and you won t be able to save any data You can delete unneeded files on the disk page 75 or ex change the disk for a new one and repeat the save operation When the save operation is finished the sub menu will return to Save To Disk If a write error occurs YES during a save opera tion Disk Error will be displayed If the er ror reoccurs after re peating the save op eration there could be something wrong with the disk Insert a different disk in the drive and repeat the save operation Disk Operations After saving User Style 101 104 User Pad bank 37 40 and Registration Memory bank 01 32 data onto a floppy disk you can reload them into the PSR 730 630 You can also load style data from the included Sample Disk or commercially available Yamaha Style File disks 1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive Insert the floppy disk that has the data you want to load into the floppy disk drive 2 Select a Load Function Use the MENU A and F buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in
122. EVERB Button Shortcut gt CHORUS Button e nn Ic Shortcut gt DSP Button Als oer tana alain DSP return level setting 46 PSR 730 630 Display MENU SUB MENU Structure MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE DEBT Harmony type selection 47 Shortcut gt HARMONY Button Lr PSR 7930 icc tees Effect part setting mmn 49 Shorteut gt MULTI EFFECT Button LE PSREZ30 inertes Effect2 part 4 2 22 nnt 49 iiit rete Effect type selection 50 2 PSR 790 iiie ern Effect2 type selection 50 PSRE730 iui iier Effect1 dry wet setting 50 PSR 730 iniit meets Effect2 dry wet setting 50 e PSRE T90 cce ces Equalizer type selection 52 Shortest gt DIGITAL EQ Button HA PSRET90 cuui reete Low Gain setting Equalizer 53 L LP PSR 730 LowMidGain setting Equalizer 53 HniPSBer 80 uiuo nire MidGain setting Equalizer 53 LEY PSRE790 HighMidGain setting Equalizer 53 PA PSBE Y930 Jii reete HighGain setting Equalizer 53
123. F Reverb Type MSB Refer to the Ef Type List 00 7F Reverb Type LSB 00 basic type 02 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 04 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 05 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 06 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 07 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 08 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 09 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 0 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 0B 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 0C 1 00 7F Reverb Return 61 0 96 127 0 1 01 7F Reverb Pan L63 C R63 1 64 127 TOTAL SIZE 0E 02 01 10 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 11 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 12 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 13 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 14 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 15 1 00 7F Reverb Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef Parameter List TOTAL SIZE 6 02 01 20 2 00 7F Chorus Type MSB Refer to the Ef Type List 00 7F Chorus Type LSB 00 basic type 22 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 23 1 00 7F Chorus Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 24 1 00 7F
124. FT PEDAL v 0 63 OFF 64 127 0N 71 HARMONIC CONTENT 0 64 64 0 127 63 2 c 72 RELEASE TIME 0 64 64 0 127 63 2 csn ATTACK TIME 0 64 64 0 127 63 2 74 v 0 64 64 0 127 63 2 84 PORTAMENT CONTROL 0 127 2 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL 0 127 c 93 CHORUS SEND LEVEL v 0 127 94 VARIATION SEND LEVEL v 0 127 When only Connection I System c 96 DATA INCREMENT 127 97 DATA DECREMENT 127 1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN NRPN 2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice 3 MSB 0 anything other than 63 is 0 Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received the BANK SELECT operation will be suspended When a Voice including VOICE BANK is changed set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message and transmit in the following order BANK SELECT MSB LSB PROGRAM CHANGE MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the Portamento Switch ON 0 being the shortest time and 127 being the longest PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in relation to the preset value Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is used HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that is set by the voice This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment As values get higher the sound beco
125. Guitar 4 0 112 2 Midi Grand 63 0 113 26 Octave Gtr 5 0 113 2 CP 80 64 0 114 26 HawaiianGtr 6 0 114 4 Galaxy EP 65 0 112 27 CleanGuitar 7 0 112 5 DX Modern 66 0 113 27 Tremolo Gtr 8 0 112 4 Funk EP 67 0 114 27 Slap Guitar 9 0 115 5 Modern EP 68 0 113 28 Funk Guitar 10 0 113 5 Hyper Tines 69 0 112 28 MutedGuitar 11 0 116 5 New Tines 70 0 113 29 FeedbackGtr 12 0 114 5 Venus EP 71 0 112 29 Overdrive 13 0 113 4 Tremolo EP 72 0 112 30 Distortion 14 0 114 2 Rock Piano 73 0 115 27 PedalSteel 15 0 112 7 Clavi Bass 16 0 113 7 Wah Clavi 74 0 112 32 Aco Bass 17 0 112 6 Harpsichord 75 0 114 32 Bass amp Cymbal 18 0 113 6 GrandHarpsi 76 0 112 33 FingerBass Chromatic Percussion 77 0 112 34 Pick Bass 19 0 112 11 Vibraphone 78 0 112 35 Fretless 20 0 113 11 Jazz Vibes 79 0 113 35 Jaco Bass 21 0 112 12 Marimba 80 0 119 17 Organ Bass 22 0 112 13 Xylophone 81 0 112 36 Slap Bass 23 0 112 114 Steel Drums 82 0 112 37 Funk Bass 24 0 112 8 Celesta 83 0 113 36 Fusion Bass 25 0 112 9 Glocken 84 0 112 38 Synth Bass 26 0 112 10 Music Box 85 0 112 39 Analog Bass 27 0 112 14 TubularBells 86 0 113 39 Dance Bass 28 0 112 108 Kalimba 87 0 113 38 Hi Q Bass 29 0 112 47 Timpani 88 0 114 38 Rave Bass 30 0 112 15 Dulcimer Solo Strings Organ 89 0 112 40 Solo Violin 31 0 112 16 Jazz Organ1 90 0 113 40 Soft Violin 32 0 113 16 Jazz Organ2 91 0 112 110 Fiddle 33 0 112 17 Click Organ 92 0 112 41 Viola 34 0 113 17 Dance Organ 93 0 112 42 Cello 35 0 115 16 Drawbar Org 94 0 112 43 Contrabass
126. H RELEASE OOH 40H 7FH 64 0 63 14H rH mmH FILTER CUTOFF FREQ 40H 64 0 63 15H rrH mmH DRUMFILTER RESONANCE 40H 7FH 64 0 63 16H rH mmH DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE 40H 64 0 63 17H rH mmH DRUM AEG DECAY RATE 40H 7FH 64 0 63 18H rH mmH DRUM PITCH COARSE OOH 40H 7FH 64 0 63 19H rH mmH PITCH FINE 00H 40H 7FH 64 0 63 1AHrrH mmH DRUM LEVEL 00H 7FH 0 max 1CHrH mmH DRUM PANPOT 00H 01H 40H 7 random left center right 1DHrrH mmH DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL 00H 7FH 0 max 1EHrrH DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL 00H 7FH 0 max rrH DRUMVARIATION SEND LEVEL 7FH 0 max The MSG14H 1FH for drums message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum voice rrH drum instrument note number 3 5 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES 3 5 1 MIDI CLOCK STATUS 11111000 F8H Transmission 96 clocks per measure are transmitted Reception If the instrument s clock is set to external after FAH is received from the external device the instrument s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure received from the external device Decides whether the internal clock or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will be used 3 5 2 START STATUS 11111010 FAH Transmission Transmitted when instrument s Rhythm or So
127. H 06H m m DATA ENTRY LSB BnH 26H 2 MAIN VOLUME BnH 07H 3 03 0000 0011 67 43 PANPOT BnH 0AH 04 0000 0100 68 14 EXPRESSION BnH 0BH 5 05 0000 0101 69 45 SUSTAIN BnH 40H 6 06 0000 0110 70 46 SOSTENUTE BnH 42H 7 07 0000 0111 71 47 SOFT PEDAL BnH 43H 8 08 0000 1000 72 48 REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH 5BH 2 0809 1901 E 23 VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH 5EH 10 0A 0000 1010 74 4A 2E onoo ioi i 12 PROGRAM CHANGE CnH 12 oc 0000 1100 76 4c 13 0 0000 1101 4D PITCH BEND EnH 14 OE 0000 1110 78 4E 15 DE BOGU SET 75 E SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 16 10 0001 0000 80 50 YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT 17 11 0001 0001 81 51 UNIVERSAL 18 12 0001 0010 82 52 UNIVERSAL REALTIME FOH 7FH F7H 19 13 0001 0011 83 53 UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME 7EH F7H 20 14 0001 0100 84 54 XG STANDARD I 2 fs 00010101 85 55 XG PARAMETER CHANGE FOH 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH 22 16 0001 0110 86 56 2 N e T a O a T ub og ddH F7H z TET XG BULK DUMP FOH 43H OnH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH 25 T 00T 1607 m EM ddH ddH F7H 26 1A 0001 1010 90 5A SPECIAL OPERATORS 27 1B 0001 1011 91 5B vs 16 32 5B SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE 29 1D 0001 1101 93 5D MIDI CLOCK F8H 30 1E 0001 1110 94 5E START FAH 31 1F 0001 1111 95 5F STOP FCH 32 20 0010 0000 96 60 ACTIVE SENSING FEH 33 21 97 61 34 22 98 62 35 23 99 63 36 24 100 64 37 25 101 65 6 2 RECEIVE FLOW 28 104 68 MIDI gt NOTE OFF 8nH 29 105 69 IN 22 206
128. HYTHM BASS GHORD PHRASE PHRASE ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 2 RO 5 6 7 8 9 Tu Rehearsal Mode If the SYNC START button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode it SYNC STOP O START will be canceled the beat lamps will go out and the PSR 730 630 will enter MENT ER Rehearsal Mode In this mode you can try playing your song before actually Xy recording it Pressing the SYNC START button will return to Record Ready Mode 7 Select a Voice If Necessary If necessary select a voice for the track to be recorded by pressing the VOICE button and selecting in the normal way The Registration Memory buttons will be disabled in the Style record mode 8 Record Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the START STOP button The BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the Before actually starting to current beat and the MEASURE parameter will show the current measure record you can try playing the PSR 730 630 the way it is set up by using the Re START STOP hearsal Mode press the e number during recording 4 7 eee SYNC START button to temporarily disengage the record ready mode re hearse as necessary then press the SYNC START button again to return to the record ready mode If the memory becomes full MEASURE BEAR while recording Full will appear on th
129. Hz 50Hz 14 114 5 High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 5 Feedback Level 99 99 1 127 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz 2 0kHz 8 40 table 3 6 7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 11 Pan 1 L63 R63 1 127 12 12 Output Level 1 0 127 0 127 13 13 Pan2 L63 R63 1 127 14 14 Output Level 2 0 127 0 127 15 Input Mode mono stereo 0 1 15 16 16 2BAND EQ STEREO variation insertion block PITCH CHANGE 2 variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 1 Pitch 24 24 40 88 2 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 2 Initial Delay 0 127 0 127 table 7 3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 3 Fine 1 50 50cent 14 114 4 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 4 Fine2 50 50 14 114 5 5 Feedback Level 99 99 1 127 6 6 7 4 8 8 9 9 10 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 11 1 L63 R63 1 127 12 12 Output Level 1 0 127 0 127 13 13 Pan2 L63 R63 1 127 14 14 Output Level 2 0 127 0 127 15 15 16 16 AUTO WAH variation insertion block COMPRESSOR variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0 00 2 39 7 2 0 127 table 1 1 Attack 1 40ms 0 19 table 8 2 LFO Depth 0 127 0 127 2 Release 10 680ms 0 15 table 9 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 127 0 12
130. L OFF binary 11110000 01000011 01110011 01000101 00010001 0000nnnn 01001001 Ovvvvvvv 11110111 hexadecimal FO Exclusive status 43 YAMAHA ID Ta Clavinova ID 45 CVP 98 96 94 92 ID 1 Sub ID ON N MIDI Channel 45 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off VV Value VV off 7FH on 00H F7 End of Exclusive When On is received subsequent volume expression and PAN changes are only valid after the reception of the next key on Normal operation resumes when Off is received Table 1 1 Parmeter Basic Address SYSTEM INFORMATION EFFECT 1 MULTI EQ EFFECT 2 MULTI PART DRUM Parameter Change Address H M L Description 00 00 00 System 00 00 7D Drum Setup Reset 00 00 7E XG System On 00 00 7F All Parameter Reset 01 00 00 System Information 02 01 00 Effectl Reverb Chorus Variation 02 40 00 Multi EQ PSR 730 ONLY 03 00 00 Effect2 PSR 730 ONLY 08 00 00 Multi Part 1 08 OF 00 Multi Part 16 30 OB 00 Drum Setup 1 Address 31 OB 00 Drum Setup 2 3n 0B 00 3n 0C 00 3n 5B 00 lt Table 1 2 gt MIDI Parameter Change table SYSTEM Address H 00 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 7D 7E IF TOTAL SIZE 6 Size 4 MIDI Data Format 3 6 5 Others 3 6 5 1 MIDI MASTER TUNING Recive only binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn IN When N is received N 0 F whichever is received 00100111 27 Model ID 001
131. LSB setting Control Change Revoice setting volume pan pot etc System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device Message Name PSR 730 630 Operation Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb chorus DSP settings etc Realtime Messages Clock setting Start stop operation The messages transmitted received by the PSR 730 630 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 168 and 169 MIDI Functions MIDI Terminal TO HOST Terminal In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices each device must NOTE j be connected by a cable When using the TO HOST terminal to connect to a There are two ways to connect from the MIDI terminals of the PSR 730 630 personal computerusing to the MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable or from the TO Windows a Yamaha MIDI HOST port of the PSR 730 630 to the serial port of a personal computer using driver must De the personal computer a special cable The Yamaha MIDI driver If you connect from the PSR 730 630 TO HOST terminal to a personal can be Yamaha s home page on computer the PSR 730 630 will be used as a MIDI interface device meaning the World Wide Web http www yamaha co jp
132. List 00 7 Vari Param 3 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 48 2 00 7F Vari Param 4 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Vari Param 4 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 4 2 00 7F Vari Param 5 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Vari Param 5 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List Default Value H 01 HALL1 00 Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type 60 40 Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type Depend on Reverb type 41 Chorus1 00 Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type 60 40 00 Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type Depend on Chorus Type 05 DELAY L C R 00 Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Address H 4C 4E 50 52 54 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 TOTAL SIZE 21
133. Multi Recording you can record up to 16 tracks for a single song The default settings for the tracks are as follows Track 1 For recording keyboard playing R1 part Track 2 For recording keyboard playing R2 part Track 3 For recording keyboard playing L part Tracks 4 5 For recording keyboard playing R1 part Tracks 6 8 For recording harmony notes Harmony type 7 16 Tracks 9 16 For recording Auto Accompaniment notes RHYTHM 1 PHRASE 2 1 Engage the Song Record Mode and Select the User Song In the same way as steps 3 for Quick Recording engage the Song Recording Mode and select the user song number 2 Select the Record Method Use the SUB MENU A and buttons so that Quick Record or Multi Record record method selection screen appears on the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select Multi Record as the record method 3 Select the Track and Part to Record Select the track and the part to be recorded on that track Default parts are already set for recording but you can change them as needed Use the SUB MENU A and V buttons so that Part Select record part selection screen appears on the display Even though three tracks track 1 4 and 5 are pre pared for R1 part as the default the R1 part perfor mance cannot be re corded to the multiple tracks at the same
134. NTIAL DAMAGES Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages Therefore these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from state to state CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities 1 Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to the retailer selling the product an authorized service center or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date sales receipt credit card copy etc when requesting service and or parts under warranty Shipping and or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility Units shipped for service should be packed securely Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days IMPORTANT Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization A Retum Authorization RA will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed Your owner
135. O O 27 Rock Kit 10 Techno Synth1 28 11 Techno Synth2 O O O O 29 Analog Kit 12 O O O O 30 Tom Flam 13 Crystal O O O O 31 Latin Percusion1 14 Twinkle O O O O 32 Latin Percussion2 15 Magical O O O 33 Timbales 16 Piano Sequence O O O O 34 Analog Sequence 17 Banjo Sequence O O O O 35 Conga Sequence 18 Gothic O O O O 36 Techno Sequence The Multi Pads Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On Off The CHORD MATCH function can be individually turned on or off for each of the MULTI PADs as described below The chord match function has no effect with pads that contain percussion phrases 1 Select the MULTI PAD Function Use the MENU A and F buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to MULTI PAD to the left of the display SUB MENU MENU DISK MULTI PAD 4 REGIST MEMORY MENU D DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL y GROOVE amp DYNAMICS 2 Select a CHORD MATCH Function Use the SUB MENU A and VW buttons to select P1 ChdMatch P2ChdMatch P3ChdMatch or PAChdMatch depending on the pad for which you want to turn i The chord watcher the CHORD MATCH function on or off off status depends on the selected Multi Pad 3 Turn the CHORD MATCH Function On or Off Use the and
136. OMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R ACCOMPANIMENT e _ ON OFF Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 Start Stop Recording Record the track s in the same way as steps 5 7 for Quick Recording Since the recorded accompaniment data is recorded on each accompaniment You can also use Re track it can be edited using the Song Edit function page 97 hearsal Mode to prac tice before recording when doing Multi Re cording About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied Only one type of each of the Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP and Multi Effect PSR 730 can be set at one time Be aware of the following facts especially when recording a song with different effects applied to the different tracks Reverb type and Chorus type effects be set and recorded independently for each of the 16 tracks However only the latest settings made one each will be effective if several effects are used in a song the latest setting priority EX While the panel REVERB button is turned on 1 Select the Hall 1 Reverb for the Accompaniment track and record the Accompa niment track for ten measures from the beginning 2 Start recording the keyboard R1 track with the Hall 1 Reverb selected from the beginning and then change the effect type to Room 1 Reverb respectively from the fifth measure through the end When you play back the song recorded as above the first four measures will be played back with the Hall 1 applied t
137. OR variation insertion block TOUCH WAH 2 variation insertion block TOUCH WAH ODRV variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0 127 0 127 e 1 Sensitive 0 127 0 127 2 AMP Type Off Stack Combo Tube 0 3 2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 127 0 127 e 3 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 3 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 4 Output Level 0 127 0 127 4 5 5 6 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 7 EQLow Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 8 High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 11 Edge Clip Curve 0 127 0 127 mild sharg 11 Drive 0 127 0 127 12 12 EQ Low Gain distortion 12 12dB 52 76 18 13 EQ Mid Gain distortion 12 12dB 52 76 14 14 LPF Cutoff 1 0kHz thru 34 60 table 3 15 15 Output Level 0 127 0 127 16 16 3BAND EQ MONO variation insertion block PITCH CHANGE 1 variation block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 1 Pitch 24 24 40 88 2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz 14 54 table 3 2 Initial Delay 0 127 0 127 table 7 3 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB 52 76 3 Fine 1 50Hz 50Hz 14 114 4 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12 0 10 120 4 Fine2 50
138. Offset 0 127 0 127 e 3 Resonance 1 0 12 0 10 120 4 5 6 EQLow Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 7 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 11 Drive 0 127 0 127 12 13 14 15 16 MIDI Data Format Table 1 11 Effect Data Value Assign Table Table Table 4 Table 7 Table 11 LFO Frequency Reverb time Delay Time 400 0ms Reverb Width Depth Height Data Data Value Data Value Data Data Data Value Data Value Data Data Value Data Data Data Data Value Data Data Value 0 0 00 32 1
139. REALTIME 7EH F7H XG STANDARD XG PARAMETER CHANGE FOH 43H InH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH is ddH F7H XG BULK DUMP FOH 43H OnH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH aaH ddH ddH ccH F7H PARAMETER REQUEST FOH 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H DUMP REQUEST FOH 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H CLAVINOVA MIDI COMPLIANCE SPETIAL OPERATORS Others SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE MIDI CLOCK F8H START FAH STOP FCH ACTIVE SENSING FEH 3 TRANSMIT RECEIVE DATA 3 1 CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES Q 3 1 1 NOTE OFF Recive only STATUS 1000nnnn 80H 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER NOTE NUMBER Okkkkkkk k 0 C 2 127 G8 VELOCITY Ovvvvvvv v ignored 3 1 2 NOTE ON OFF STATUS 1001nnnn 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER NOTE NUMBER Okkkkkkk k 0 C 2 127 G8 VELOCITY Ovvvvvvv v 10 NOTE ON 00000000 v 2 0 NOTE OFF 3 1 3 PROGRAM CHANGE STATUS 1100nnnn CH 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER PROGRAM NUMBER p 0 127 PROGRAM NUMBER XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence P 1 Standard Kit P 2 Standard2 Kit 9 Room Kit P 17 Rock Kit P 25 Elctrnic Kit P 26 Analog Kit P 28 Dance Kit P 33 Jazz Kit 41 Brush Kit 49 Classic Kit PROGRAM NUMBER XG SFX KIT number correspondence Paf SFXI Kit 2 SFX Kit When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM VOICE is received the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the new DRUM VOICE 3 1 4 CH
140. Strings voice is added to the melody to create an orchestral atmosphere 16 Forest Twitterings of a bird are added to the melody to create an effect as if you were playing outside The Harmonies except for the types 6 7 and 9 are applied to the R1 voice according to the chords detected in the Accompaniment sec tion Refining User Styles with Style File Format Style File Auto Accompaniment Format Source Pattern lil Source chord root setting Source chord type setting The Style File Format SFF is a compilation of all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment know how into a single unified format Since the PSR 730 630 supports the SFF format you can enjoy many styles in addition to the 100 preset SFF styles Just insert a disk with SFF styles on it into the disk drive and you can load them into the J Chord change NTR Note Transposition Rule Note Transposition rule setting NTT Note Transposition Table E Note Transposition table setting y Other Settings Highest Key setting Note range Low Limit High Limit settings Retrigger Rule RTR setting y Accompaniment PSR 730 630 By using the user style function you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own user styles With the Auto Accompaniment function chord changes transposi tions are applied to the source pattern that forms the basis for the accompanimen
141. T 10 1 00 7F Not Used 11 1 00 7 Not Used TOTAL SIZE 12 03 On 20 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 21 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter12 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 22 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter13 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 23 1 00 7 Insertion Parameter14 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 24 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter15 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 25 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter16 Refer to the Ef Parameter List TOTAL SIZE 06 03 0n 30 2 00 7F Ins 1 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins 1 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 32 2 00 7F Ins Param 2 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7 Ins Param 2 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 34 2 00 7F Ins Param 3 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 3 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 36 2 00 7F Ins Param 4 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 4 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 On 38 2 00 7F Ins Param 5 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 5 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 3A 2 00 7F Ins Param 6 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7 Ins Param 6 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 3C 2 00 7F Ins Param 7 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 7 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 3E 2 00 7F Ins Param 8 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 8 LSB Refer to th
142. T SOFT EQ DISCO EQTEL f 25 WAH i 18 ig fag HALL HALL HALL ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM STAGE STAGE PLATE PlaE Delay LCR FLANGER FLANGER DIST HARD DIST SOFT EQ DISCO EQ TEL Auto Wah MIDI Data Format Table 1 10 Effect Parameter List HALL1 HALL2 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROONG STAGE1 STAGE2 PLATE reverb variation insertion block CROSS DELAY variation insertion block No Parameter Value See Table Control No Parameter Value See Table Control 1 L gt R Delay 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 1 Reverb Time 0 3 30 05 0 69 table 4 0 1 371 4ms insertion block 1 3714 2 Diffusion 0 10 0 10 2 R gt L Delay 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 3 Initial Delay 0 63 0 63 table 5 0 1 371 4ms insertion block 1 3714 4 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 5 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 4 Input Select L R L amp R 0 2 6 5 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 y 6 8 7 9 8 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 9 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 11 Rev Delay 0 63 0 63 table 5 12 Density 0 4 reverb variation block 0 4 11 0 2 insertion block 0 2 12 13 Er Rev Balance E63 gt R E R E lt R63 1 127 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 14 High Damp 0
143. T STOP Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the START STOP button on the panel BREAK When you step on the foot switch accompaniment will stop Releasing the switch with the foot will cause it to play again from the next measure BASS HOLD When one of the Fingering Modes other than Full Keyboard is selected the bass root note will be held as long as you step on the footswitch INTRO Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the INTRO button on the panel MAIN A AUTO FILL Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN A AUTO FILL button on the panel MAIN B AUTO FILL Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the MAIN B AUTO FILL button on the panel ENDING Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the ENDING button on the panel DSP VARIATION Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the DSP VARIATION button on the panel HARMONY Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the HARMONY button on the panel GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Stepping on the foot switch has the same effect as pressing the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS button on the panel Overall Functions Only Pedal 2 Functions EXPRESSION Simultaneously controls the volume of the R1 R2 and L voices your performance R1 VOLUME Controls the R1 voice volume R2 VOLUME Controls the R2 voice
144. Touch sensitivity setting 115 Pitch bend range setting PS Overall tuning a 119 Scale tuning note setting 115 Scale tuning value setting sas 115 EEE Song transposition setting 116 m E Split point setting Split voice 21 cr Split point setting Auto accompaniment 30 tee dos eec adds Fingering mode selection 91 Shortcut gt AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON OFF Button Pedal1 polarity setting 118 Pedal2 polarity setting 118 GROOVE amp DYNAMICS PSR 730 jmm Beat groove template selection 36 Shortcut gt GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Button Sub menu items with Sort gt have shortcut access press and hold the specified button for a few seconds to jump directly to the associated sub menu function In addition to the shortuts listed above the DUAL VOICE button can be held to jump to the R2 voice revoice function and the SPLIT VOICE button can be held to jump to the L voice revoice function Voice List Maximum Polyphony The PSR 730 has 64 note maximum polyphony and the PSR 630 has 32 NOTE Jj Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes so when Auto The Voice List includes MIDI pro
145. YAMAHA PORTATONE PSR 730 PSR 630 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply adapter DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual on the name plate or specifically recom mended by Yamaha This product should be used only with the components supplied or a cart rack or stand that is recommended by Yamaha If a cart etc is used please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom pany the accessory product SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units This product either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head phones or speaker s may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs NOTICE Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the manufacturer s warranty and ar
146. a 153 MIDI Implementation Chart 168 Specifications 1 2 2 2 171 INDOX que ere ees 172 i Panel Controls PSR 730 YAMAHA C PARELVOIGE C xsvoice J BEAT 242 07 RHYTHMRELUES 082 083 CARIBBEAN 00 09 PIANO 08 098 BASS 38 176 PIPE 228 368 PIANO 3 45 STRINGS E 557 SYNTH PAD 16 048 051 ROCKAROLL 087 BALLROOM LATIN 620 CHROMATIC 097 108 SOLO STRINGS 177 194 SYNTH LEAD 267 286 CHROMATIC 408 439 ENSEMBLE 558 SYNTH EFFECTS 2 GB BALLAD 052 060 COUNTRYAWESTERN 088 09 BALLROOM STANDARD PERCUSSION 109 128 ENSEMBLE 195 215 SYNTH PAD PERCUSSION 440 71 BRASS 614 ETHNIC DANCE 081 065 TRADITIONAL JAZZ 092 005 MARCH 032 ORGAN 120 137 216 227 DRUM KITS 287 322 ORGAN 472 2 iS 657 PERCUSSIVE Disco 065 070 CONTEMPORARY JAZZ 096 100 WALTZ 055 061 ACCORDION 138 153 303 7 351 GUITAR 665 SOUND EFFECTS ROCK o 062 GUITAR 154 168 352 33 BASS 86 70 SEX
147. a MULTI PAD with a pitched voice the Chord Match function see page 63 can be specified for that pad by using the SUB MENU buttons to select the Chord Match function for the corresponding pad P1ChdMatch PAChdMatch while in the record standby or rehearsal mode and then using the button to turn it On or Off as you like NOTE e If the RECORD but ton is pressed while a preset pad set is se lected the lowest numbered user pad set which does not contain any recorded data will automatically be selected If other user pad sets already contain data how ever user pad num ber 1 will be selected The DSP effect can not be turned on dur ing MULTI PAD re cording or the MULTI PAD record standby mode If the DSP ef fect is on when the MULTI PAD record mode is engaged it will automatically be turned off If the Metronome function is on page 116 the metronome will sound at the cur rent tempo The Chord Match on off status can be changed in the SUB MENU MULTI PAD even after exiting the recording mode Multi Pad Recording 6 Record Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard synchro start or press the START STOP button and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode If you are recording a Chord Match phrase be sure to base your phrase on a CM7 chord to ensure proper Chord Match operati
148. acks By setting the note range you can prevent unrealistic notes such as high notes from a bass or low notes from a piccolo from being produced and have them shifted to an octave within the note range Example When low limit is C3 and high limit is D4 CM C M FM E3 G3 C4 0 3 4 F3 A3 C4 Root change Notes played After finishing recording with the recorded track selected select LowLimit and HighLimit from the submenu and use the and buttons or the Data Dial to set the note range LowLimits PFiuhLimi mi en E Retrigger Rule RTR setting Set the method for handling notes as they are being produced during chord change transposition There are 5 rule types as explained below Stop The note is stopped while being produced and the next note is sounded PitchShift The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to match the new chord type PShftToRoot The pitch of the note being produced is shifted to the note of the new chord root The octave ofthe note is not changed by the shift Retrigger The note is stopped while being produced and it is sounded again with its pitch matching that of the new chord type Ret ToRoot The note is stopped while being produced and it is sounded again with the note of the new chord root After finishing recording with the recorded track selected select from the sub menu and use the and buttons or the Data
149. actually clear the currently selected track s Press NO if you want to abort the clear operation Multi Pad Recording In addition to the preset MULTI PAD sets the PSR 730 630 has 16 user recordable sets that you can use to store your own creations Material recorded in the MULTI PADs will be retained even after turning the power off See page 152 for the details The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off the AC adaptor is unplugged or the batteries fail during recording The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data Note on off Velocity RI voice voice number volume reverb depth chorus depth pan Chord match on off Pitch bend pitch bend range Modulation Sustain on off Expression with Pedal2 Brightness with Pedal2 Resonance with Pedal2 Multi Pad Recording Procedure Up to approximately 100 notes for each pad can be recorded in the PSR 730 630 MULTI PADs 1 Engage the Record Ready Mode Press the RECORD button to engage the record ready mode The RECORD button indicator will light and the SONG STYLE and MULTI PAD 1 4 icons will flash indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes H nn i Bear y Rii
150. ad phrases simply play back as programmed while others are chord match types which if the CHORD MATCH function is turned on are automatically transposed to match chords played using the PSR 730 630 Auto Accompaniment feature Selecting a MULTI PAD Set The PSR 730 630 has 36 multi pad sets each containing a complete set of 4 MULTI PAD phrases 144 phrases in all Before using the MULTI PADS select the MULTI PAD set containing the phrases you want to use as follows 1 Select the Multi Pad Function To select a multi pad set first use the MENU A and F buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to MULTI PAD to the left of the display SUB MENU MENU s5 gt 9 DISK MULTI PAD 4 2 REGIST MEMORY MENU MIDI 0 DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL Y GROOVE amp DYNAMICS 2 Select a Multi Pad Set Number If necessary use the SUB MENU A F buttons so that the name of the currently selected MULTI PAD set appears on the display see list on page 62 then Press and hold the use the and number buttons or data dial to select the MULTI PAD set you want MULTI PAD STOP to use button for a few sec onds to go directly to the MULTI PAD SET display The Multi Pads a Playing the MULTI PADS Simply tap any of the MULTI PADs at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently
151. after a Bulk Dump request is received System Data Multi Effect Data Individual effect unit Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data Individual part unit Drums Setup Data Individual note unit System Information Individual only 3 6 3 3 XG PARAMETER REQUEST Recive only binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 001 1nnnn 3n Device Number 01001100 4C Model ID Address High Qaaaaaaa AA Address Mid Address Low 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to lt Table 1 2 gt Table 1 8 pages 157 162 The 4 data types listed below are received System Data Multi Effect Data Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data Drums Setup Data 3 6 3 4 XG DUMP REQUEST Recive only binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0010nnnn 2n Device Number 01001100 4C Model ID Address High Address Mid Address Low 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to lt Table 1 2 gt lt Table 1 8 gt pages 157 162 The 5 data types listed below are received System Data Multi Effect Data Individual module unit Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data Individual part unit Drums Setup Data Individual note unit System Information 3 6 4 SPECIAL OPERATORS 3 6 4 1 VOLUME EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTRO
152. aha KHS Music Co Ltd 10 150 Tun Hwa Northroad Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 2713 8999 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 121 60 61 RS Tower 17th Floor Ratchadaphisek RD Dindaeng Bangkok 10320 Thailand Tel 02 641 2951 THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd 17 33 Market Street South Melbourne Vic 3205 Australia Tel 3 699 2388 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation International Marketing Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Electronic Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 3273 YAMAHA YAMAHA CORPORATION M D G EMI Division 1997 Yamaha Corporation VY78900 808POCP3 3 05E0 Printed in Japan
153. al All receive channels are set to Bass When playing the PSR 730 630 using a connected optional MIDI pedal The connected MIDI pedal detects chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section allowing you to play on bass chords 4 Keyboard Out The transmit channels are set as follows 1ch Right 2ch Right2 4ch Left 3ch 5 16ch Off When outputting the performance data note on off messages Used to play the PSR 730 630 note on off data with an external tone generator and to record the PSR 730 630 note on off data to an external sequencer 5 Acmp Out The transmit channels 9 16 are set with the Accompaniment tracks 9 10ch Rhythms 11ch Bass 12 13ch Chords 14ch Pad 15 16ch Phrases When outputting the style data Used to play the PSR 730 630 auto accompaniment data with an external tone generator and to record the PSR 730 630 auto accompaniment data to an external sequencer 6 Song Out All transmit channels are set with the Song tracks 1 16 When outputting the song data Used to play the PSR 730 630 song data with an external tone generator and to record your entire performance on the PSR 730 630 to an external sequencer 7 User Other than the above settings 1 6 hne PSR 730 630 Display MENU SUB MENU Structure MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE 13 R1 voice name R1 voice selection eene 17
154. ally from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified and Bie song If the MAIN AUTO will continue until either the MAIN AUTO FILL A button is pressed again to cancel FILL B button is the repeat function or until song playback is stopped pressed during repeat playback the previ ously specified B MAIN ALS point will be cancelled A e and a new B point D can be specified as n B ane e REGISTRATION MEMORY Repeat playback Will continue even if a dif ferent menu is se MAIN AUTO FILL lected during repeat A 9 5 playback E B o Repeat playback will W REGISTRATION MEMORY be cancelled if a dif ferent SONG number selected or the record mode is engaged Song Playback Song Repeat The Song Repeat feature is handy when you want to repeat playback of a particular song 1 Select Song Number To select the song see page 76 2 Turn on the Song Repeat After making sure that the SONG menu is selected use the SUB MENU A and V buttons so that SongRepeat appears on the display The current SongRepeat setting will be shown on the top line of the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to set the on off state to the Song Repeat function 3 Start Playback Playback will begin as soon as the START STOP button is pressed Until you 0 press the START STOP button once again Song Repeat playback will continue
155. and W buttons to move the triangular indicator next to REGIST MEMORY in the menu list to the left of the display the currently selected registration bank number and name will appear on the top line of the display Then use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired bank 1 through 32 Shortcut Press and hold the REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY button for a few sec onds to go directly to the REGIST MEMORY display Registration Memory On the PSR 730 there are BANK V and A buttons Pressing these buttons will directly bring up the registration bank sub menu example Bank 1 of the Regist Memory main menu item and all you have to do is add the correct number BANK MEMORY REGIS 3 Register the Settings While holding the MEMORY button press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons 1 through 4 The corresponding REGISTRATION MEMORY number will appear below REGISTRATION in the display REGISTRATION MEMORY m REPEAT REGISTRATION MEMORY Naming the Registration Banks You can give your own names up to 8 characters to the registration banks where you have stored settings After recalling the registration settings you wish to name use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator next to REGIST MEMORY in the menu list to the left of the display Then use t
156. anel settings as when the power switch is first turned on ia _ M MM H M M MY Registering the Panel Settings Set Up the Controls as Required Make the desired control settings The following settings are memorized by the Registration Memory function Data Stored By the Registration Memory Transpose Reverb type Chorus type Groove amp Dynamics ON OFF templates rates Style number Style names page 104 for the user styles VOICE PARAMETERS ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS e R1 Voice Voice number Split Point Split Voice Auto Accompaniment ON OFF Ven ERE p Touch Sensitivity Fingering mode orus depth Reverb ON OFF Tempo Chorus ON OFF Split point Dual Voice ON OFF DSP ON OFF variation Auto Accompaniment VIFUS VOICE VOICE NUMDEN ON OFF Accompaniment volume volume octave pan reverb depth chorus depth DSP DSP type Track data Track ON OFF depth Multi Effect ON OFF voice volume pan reverb Split Voice ON OFF Effect 1 2 part type dry depth chorus depth L Voice Voice number wet Accompaniment section Main volume octave pan reverb Harmony ON OFF type AB depth chorus depth DSP volume Multi Pad Set number depth Pitch bend range Chord Match ON OFF Multi Pedal 1 function Modulation wheel 1 4 Pedal 2 function function Scale Tuning 2 Select a Registration Bank if necessary Use the MENU A
157. animent 5 Changing Accompaniment Sections You can vary the song by pressing INTRO MAIN AUTO FILL or ENDING buttons and changing to a different accompaniment section page 27 Try pressing the different buttons and see what happens MAIN AUTO FILL INTRO O A B O ENDING PII 6 stop the Accompaniment Press the START STOP button to stop the accompaniment START STOP If you want to stop after playing the ending press the ENDING button The accompaniment will stop after playing the ending ENDING NOTE When the Fingering Mode is set for Single Finger Fingered 1 Fingered 2 or Multi Finger playing a chord in the auto accom paniment section while the rhythm is stopped will cause Bass Chord to be played for all styles However when the Auto Accompaniment split point and the Split Voice split point are the same key playing a chord in the ac companiment section with the rhythm stopped will cause Bass L voice to be played NOTE The ending will begin playing immediately when you press the ENDING button while the accompa niment is playing the first beat of the measure The ending will begin playing from the next measure when you press the button while the ac companiment is playing the second or larger num bered beat If you press the INTRO button while the ending is playing the intro section will begin playing after the
158. ant to abort the clear operation If the pad you se lected has already been cleared Bank Clear will ap pear on the display If the pad you se lected has already been cleared Pad Clear will ap pear on the display Revoicing The PSR 730 630 REVOICE function lets you change the following parameters for the R1 R2 and L voices and the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT tracks Revoice Parameters Parameter Display Range Comments Voice Voice Name PSR 730 Assigns a voice number to the specified 1 707 PSR 730 630 voice or track PSR 630 1 692 Volume Volume 0 127 Sets the volume of the specified PSR 730 630 voice or track Octave 2 2 Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track up or down by one or two octaves A setting of 0 produces normal pitch Pan Far 7 7 Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to rightin the stereo sound field 7 is full left 7 is full right 0 is center and all other settings are corresponding positions in between Reverb Depth 0 127 Sets the reverb depth for the specified voice or track and thus the amount of reverb effect applied to that voice or track Chorus Depth Chobertih0 127 Sets the chorus depth for the specified voice ortrack and thus the amount of chorus effect applied to that voice or track DSP Depth Dzmberih 0 127 Sets the DSP depth for the s
159. arameter will also show the current measure number during recording wn START STOP A 5 6 BI MEASURE EAT MULTI PAD Rehearsal Mode If the SYNC START button is pressed while in Record Ready Mode it will be NOTE f you start recording without selecting a spe cific track while the panel AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT button is ON the MELODY 1 and ACMP tracks will auto matically be selected for recording NOTE e The ACMP track and one MELODY track can be recorded together at the same time If the ACMP track is turned off AUTO AC COMPANIMENT on the panel will also be turned off If AUTO ACCOMPANI MENT is turned on the ACMP track will be auto matically selected for re cording AUTO ACCOMPANI MENT cannot be turned on or off during record ing SYNC STOP O START canceled the beat indicator dots will go out and the PSR 730 630 will enter Xy Rehearsal Mode In this mode you can try playing your song before actually recording it Pressing the SYNC START button will return to Record Ready Mode Before actually starting to record you can try playing the PSR 730 630 the way it is set up by using the Rehearsal Mode press the SYNC START button to temporarily disen gage the record ready mode rehearse as necessary then press the SYNC START button again to return to the record ready mode Whenever
160. are two types of rules Root Transposition Rule This rule maintains the mutual relationship in pitch between each note when transposing Set this for tracks that contain melody like phrases Root Fixed Rule To the extent possible this rule maintains the pitch of each note in the source pattern Set it for piano type or guitar type chord picking tracks After finishing recording with the recorded track selected select from the sub menu and use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the transposition rule oy NTT Note Transposition Table Setting Note Transposition table setting Set the table for making the chord change transposition in the source pattern There are 6 tables as explained below Bypass No transposition is done Melody This table is suitable for melody line transposition Use it for tracks with melodies like PHRASE 1 2 Bass This table is suitable for bass line transposition The table contents are the same as for Melody but it recognizes chords such as in the Fingered2 mode Use it for tracks with low pitched instruments such as bass tracks Chord This table is suitable for chord transposition Use it for tracks like the CHORD 1 2 tracks with piano type or guitar type chord picking tracks M m Only M This table lowers the third by a semitone when changing from a major chord to a minor chord or raises the minor third by a
161. atted disk to record from scratch first insert the disk you want to format then press the Menu button next press the Sub Menu button to show the Format Disk YES on the display NOTE If data is already saved on the disk be careful not to format it If you format the disk all the previ ously recorded data will be de leted While formatting is in progress while Now Formatting is dis played never eject the disk or turn off the power to the PSR 730 630 NOTE j e If a disk that cannot be read by the PSR 730 630 is inserted into the disk drive it will be treated the same as an unformatted floppy disk Take care not to erase important data by acciden tally formatting a disk If you want to reformat a disk that already has been formatted for the PSR 730 630 insert the disk in the drive select the For mat Disk YES item from the sub menu of the DISK menu then proceed as for a normal for mat If you insert the formatted disk and you press the NO button or eject the disk in the step 2 the display will return to the Format Disk 9 Disk Operations You can save PSR 730 630 user styles user pad banks 37 40 and registration memory data banks 01 32 on floppy disks 1 Insert Formatted Floppy Disk If a disk has not been already inserted in the drive insert a formatted floppy disk 2 Select a Save Function SUB MENU MENU Use the MENU A and V b
162. ber button while hold ing the button When the DSP type is set as insertion the DSP depth parameter cannot be changed The REVOICE mode will automatically be exited if the MENU A and Y but tons are used to select any of the menus to the left of the display Save any revoice settings you want to keep to the PSR 730 630 REGISTRA TION MEMORY page 57 The revoice setting are tem porary and will be lost if the power is turned off a differ ent R1 panel voice is se lected while the Voice Set function is on or a REGIS TRATION MEMORY is re called m Revoicing a M Revoicing a Style 1 Select the STYLE REVOICE Mode While the STYLE menu and the style you want to revoice are selected press the RE VOICE button actually the order here is not important you can also press the STYLE button after pressing the REVOICE button The REVOICE button indicator will light and the RHYTHM 1 track will be bracketed by two horizontal bars i e the RHYTHM 1 track is initially selected for revoicing 1 115 LU 002 uu VOICE iC TRANSPOSE VOLUME REGISTRATION M DIGITAL EQ ME REVERB CHORUS DSP HARMONY STYLE D STYLE 219 218 355 337 339 06 228 360 REVOICE 5 f 7 Ds SONG 2 Select the Section s to Revoiced Press INTRO MAIN A B or ENDING button s to select the section s 3 If Necessary Se
163. ccompaniment BASS track Track 3 Chord1 Tr4 Auto Accompaniment CHORD1 track Track 4 Chord2 Tr5 Auto Accompaniment CHORD2 track Track 5 Pad Tr6 Auto Accompaniment PAD track Track 6 Phrase1 Tr7 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE 1 track Track 7 Phrase2 Tr8 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE2 track Track 8 Track 9 16 Track 9 16 Off Off nothing is transmitted The initial default channel track settings are Channel 1 R1 voice Channel 9 Rhythm1 Track1 Channel 2 L voice Channel 10 Rhythm2 Track2 Channel 3 Bass Track3 Channel 11 R2 voice Channel 4 Chord1 Track4 Channel 12 Harmony1 Channel 5 2 Track5 Channel 13 Harmony2 Channel 6 Pad Track6 Channel 14 Harmony3 Channel 7 Phrase1 Track7 Channel 15 Channel 8 Phrase2 Track8 Channel 16 Off Receive Channel amp Receive Mode The PSR 730 630 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels allowing it to function as a 16 channel multi timbral tone generator The Receive Channel and Receive Mode functions determine how each channel will respond to received MIDI data Receive Channel The Receive Ch function selects a MIDI channel to which a receive mode is to be assigned via the Receive Mode function below First select a receive channel then the receive mode for that channel Any of the standard MIDI channels 1 through 16 can be specified NOTE When a track is as signed to more than one MIDI chan
164. ce the PSR 730 Multi Effect EFFECT 1 2 is an insertion effect it will be applied to only one part from among the R1 R2 L parts The signal will enter reverb chorus DSP according to the send level Depth set for each and the signal with the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set The reverb chorus DSP send levels Depth are set for each part track with the Revoice mode The reverb chorus DSP return levels value are set in common for all the parts The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb chorus and DSP at the output for their signals Using MIDI the panning position for the effect can be set page 158 If a Send Chorus to Reverb page 158 signal is transmitted to the PSR 730 630 from an external MIDI device a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb connected in series Also if a Send Variation DSP to Reverb page 159 signal is transmitted a signal can be sent from the DSP to the reverb and in the same way if a Send Variation DSP to Chorus signal page 159 is transmitted a signal can be sent from DSP tothe chorus If these signals are used the three effects can be connected in series or used separately and a lot of different effects can be produced The bold lines are stereo lines Effect 1 is valid for Effect 2 is valid for only one part only one part Effect 1 part Effect 2 part Dry Wet Dry Wet EFFI EFF2 0 Effect 1 on off E
165. ceive PSR 730 630 MIDIIN lt MIDI OUT MIDI receive settings page 126 Record performance data 1 16 channels using the PSR 730 630 Auto Accompa niment and Multi Pad features on a external sequencer such as a personal computer After recording edit the data with the sequencer then play it again on the PSR 730 630 playback Can be usedto edit and arrange after recording MIDI transmit MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN lt MIDI OUT MIDI receive playback Personal computer MIDI transmit setting page 125 Initial send page 128 4 Connecting to a Personal Computer TO HOST Terminal HOST SELECT Switch You can enjoy using personal computer music software when you connect your PSR 730 630 s TO HOST terminal or MIDI terminals to a personal computer There are two ways to connect Connect using the PSR 730 630 MIDI terminals Connect using the TO HOST terminal Connect using the PSR 730 630 MIDI terminals Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR 730 630 For the connection cable use a special MIDI cable When the computer has a MIDI interface installed connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR 730 630 Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI When using a per sonal computer spe cial software se
166. cially available 3 5 inch floppy disk unformatted into the disk drive with the shutter on the disk towards the drive and with the label side facing upward The DISK menu will be automatically selected and the Sub Menu item Format Disk NO YES will appear on the top line of the display 2 Press the 4 YES Button When the button is pressed Execute NO YES will appear on the display 3 Start Formatting Press the YES button and disk formatting will begin Once started formatting cannot be canceled During formatting the display will read Now Formatting xx When formatting is finished the display will return to the one which was selected before inserting the disk If you don t want to format press the NO button before the step 3 or simply eject the disk The display will return to the one which was selected before inserting the disk After formatting the capacity of a 2HD disk will be 1 Mbyte and of a 2DD disk will be 720 Kbyte f you insert an unformatted disk with the write protect tab in the ON position into the drive For mat Disk NO YES will appear but when you try to format it Disk Write Protected will be displayed Eject the disk move the protect tab to the OFF posi tion and reinsert it in the drive The DISK menu won t be se lected automatically when you in sert the formatted disk If you want to format the form
167. connect from the PSR 730 630 TO HOST terminal to a personal computer the PSR 730 630 will be used as a MIDI in terface device mean ing that a specialized MIDI interface device is not necessary When the HOST SE LECT switch is set to MAC PC 1 or PC 2 don t use the MIDI IN OUT termi nals MIDI data can not be sent or re ceived through the MIDI terminals Host is Offline will be shown on the dis play when the Host Select switch is set appropriately and the serial cable is con nected to the PSR 730 630 TO HOST but not to the PC s se rial port or the cable is properly connected to the PC which is currently turned off The PSR 730 630 has the following MIDI functions Function Display Settings Page Transmit Channel 1 16 125 Transmit Track Right Off 126 1 16 126 Normal Off Remote Bass Chord 127 Off On 127 Off On 128 None 128 Receive Channel Receive Mode Local Control External Clock Initial Data Send Template User Song Out 129 To access a MIDI function first use the MENU A and F buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to MIDI then use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the desired function from within the MIDI menu When a function is selected the current setting will appear on the top line of the display Once the function has been selected use the and button
168. ct Style Press the STYLE button to select the STYLE menu the triangular indicator will appear next to STYLE to the right of the display The number and name of the currently selected style will appear on the top left of the display and the icon will light indicating that the PSR 730 630 is in Style Mode m 1 E ume alae mex ID ng 1 m 4 VOICE VOICE n MER LLL 11 AGMP SONG VOICE TRANSPOSE p E REGISTRATION MEMORY MULTI PAD e IND CHORUS MR 22 Ki SYNCSTOP E GROOVE amp DYNAMICS __ STYLE sre Xy 218 219 355 331 338 35e 84 109 E cron foro PAD PHRASE m nn 22 14 WS REF Ar SONG SONG ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 R1 Auto Accompaniment Find the style you want by referring to the style list page 142 then pressing the 1 0 number buttons enter the 1 3 digits of its style number Example Select style number 24 Dance Pop 2 Press number buttons 2 4 in sequence COMICO C SHE You also change style numbers using the buttons or the Data Dial Also you can increment the style number by pressing the STYLE button Press briefly to increment by one or hold for continuous incrementing 2 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT On Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ON OFF so that its indicator lights ACCOMPANIMENT e
169. d A buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT The icon for DIGITAL EFFECT will light Then use the SUB MENU VW and A buttons to select Effectl or Effect2 The name of the currently selected type will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the Multi Effect Type List on page 146 use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired effect type Adjust the Dry Wet Settings for Effect 1 2 Set the Dry Wet settings for Effect 1 and Effect 2 Dry refers to an original sound that has no effects applied to it while Wet means that effects are applied to a sound Dry Wet is a setting value that regulates the level of effects that are applied Dry Wet 0 Only dry sound is output Dry Wet 64 Output with the same amount of the dry wet sounds Dry Wet 127 Only wet sound is output Use the MENU F and A buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT The icon for DIGITAL EFFECT will light Then use the SUB MENU VF and A buttons to select Dry Wet or Eff2 Dry Wet The currently set Dry Wet value will appear on the right of the top line of the display Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the Dry Wet value within a range of 0 127 NOTE yy The Effect 1 2 type settings may auto
170. d 55 8Beat Country 91 Big Band Quickstep DANCE 56 Country Rock MARCH 23 Dance Pop 1 57 Cowboy Boogie 92 March 1 24 Dance Pop 2 58 Country Ballad 93 March 2 25 Techno 59 Country Shuffle 94 6 8 March 1 26 Eurobeat 60 Country Waltz 95 Polka 27 Euro House TRADITIONAL JAZZ WALTZ 28 Hip Hop 61 Swing 96 Standard Waltz 29 Trip Hop 62 Big Band Swing 97 Pop Waltz 30 Synth Boogie 63 Big Band Ballad 98 German Waltz DISCO 64 Jazz Quartet 99 Viennese Waltz 31 70s Disco 65 Dixieland 100 Musette Waltz 32 Disco Tropical CONTEMPORARY JAZZ 33 Party Pop 66 Cool Jazz 34 Polka Pop 67 Jazz Ballad 68 Jazz Waltz 69 Fusion 70 Funky Fusion About Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP There are three types of digital effects installed in the PSR 630 the reverb effect system effect the chorus effect system effect and the DSP effect can be setas either as a system effect or insertion effect In the PSR 730 the Multi Effect EFFECT 1 2 insertion is added to the three PSR 630 effects for a total of five effects There are basically two ways to use the effects with the DSP effect set as a system effect or as a insertion effect Each different way will be explained here Although not all the effect settings cannot be made by operating the PSR 730 630 panel manually some of them may be accessible through MIDI When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect The three PSR 630 effects or the five PSR 730 effects will be connected as shown below Sin
171. d by the MAIN B section Press the INTRO button so that its indicator lights press the MAIN AUTO FILL B button not necessary if its indicator is already flashing then press START STOP AUTO fit SYNC O STOP O START INTRO O ENDING Synchronized start Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord played on the left hand section of the keyboard i e keys to the left of and including the split point key normally 54 by first pressing the SYNC START button AUTO O8 SYNC STOP 6 START O INTRO OENDING START STOP START STOP NOTE If you press the SYNC START button while the accompaniment is playing the accompaniment will stop and the synchro start mode will be engaged The INTRO button can be used to select the INTRO section even while the ac companiment is playing The accompaniment split point can be changed via the Accompaniment Split Point function in the OVERALL menu see page 30 Pressing the SYNC START button alone causes a straight start to occur NOTE when the first note or chord is played Press the SYNC START button and then the appropriate INTRO and MAIN AUTO FILL buttons for a synchronized introduction start The BEAT indicator will flash at the current tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected The synchro start mode can be disengaged prior to actua
172. daptor from the wall AC outlet When turning the power ON simply reverse the procedure Data Initialization All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the power while holding the highest rightmost white key on the keyboard Backup RAM Clear will appear briefly on the display o mm y CAUTION All registration User Style Pad memory data plus the other settings listed above will be erased and or changed when the data initialization procedure is carried out Carrying out the data initialization procedure will usu ally restore normal operation if the PSR 730 630 freezes or begins to act errati cally for any reason Data Format Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal 1 TRANSMIT FLOW numbers binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter H as a suffix Also n can freely be defined as any ae NOTE ON OFF whole number CONTROL CHANGE To enter data values refer to the table below BANK SELECT MSB BnH 00H Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Decimal Hexadecimal BANE SELECT LOB BnH 20H T m DATA ENTRY MSB Bn
173. dible effect for some H1 voices ex organ sounds when you se lect Harmony types 1 through 6 With Multi Effect you can combine 2 effects Effect 1 2 and apply them to the output NOTE D from the keyboard R1 R2 L parts There are 2 ways to combine the effects in series or in parallel Example 1 Applying Effects 1 and 2 to separate parts parallel Part Effect Right Dist Hard Effect1 In Effect Part Effect 2 Rotary SP 4 Effect2 In Effect2 Example 2 Applying Effects 1 and 2 to a single part series Part Effect1 Effect1 In Effect1 Effect 2 Effect1 Auto Wah Effect2 In Effect2 By adding Multi Effect to Reverb Chorus and DSP the PSR 730 can have up to 5 system effects Since Multi Effect is installed closer to the tone generator than Reverb Chorus or DSP it can function as an insertion effect See page 143 About Digital Effects Digital Effects Applying Multi Effect PSR 730 Pressing the MULTI EFFECT button will cause the Multi Effect icon to light on the display After making part settings for Effect 1 2 and type settings the Multi Effect will be applied MULTI EFFECT Q MULTI Xy DGmaLEQ EFFECT Setting Parts for Effect 1 2 Select a part each for Effect 1 and Effect 2 Effect 1 Select Right 1 R1 part Right 2 R2 part Left L part Effect 2 Right 1 R1 part Right 2 R2 part Left L part
174. disks Recorded only at the beginning of a song changes cannot be made during recording NOTE quick recording method is different from the multi record ing method but for both of them the re corded data is re corded on tracks 1 16 NOTE yy Being able to record note on off and velocity means being able to record forte or piano crescendo or diminu endo and other subtle elements of expression from the keyboard as you play them Note ON key press note OFF key release and velocity strength of key press are MIDI data events playing information page 119 Be careful to avoid the song data loss that will occur during recording if the power is turned off the AC adaptor is unplugged from the out let or the batteries lose power Song Recording a Quick Recording Procedure With quick recording you can use 5 tracks for recording each song ACMP Used to record auto accompaniment notes such as chord change and section change data MELODY 1 4 track Used to record keyboard melody notes 1 Insert Floppy Disk and Change to Record Mode Insert the floppy disk you will use to record the user song into the floppy disk drive Press the RECORD button to engage the Record Ready Mode The RECORD button indicator will light and the SONG STYLE and MULTI PAD 1 4 icons will flash indicating that you must selec
175. dress High Address Mid Address Low Oddddddd DD Data 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive For parameters with data size of 2 or 4 transmit the appropriate number of data bytes For more information on Address and Parameters refer to lt Table 1 2 gt Table 1 8 pages 157 162 The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received XG System Data Multi Effect Data Multi EQ Data Multi Part Data Drums Setup Data 3 6 3 2 XG BULK DUMP binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0000nnnn ON Device Number 01001100 4C Model ID Obbbbbbb BB ByteCount Obbbbbbb BB ByteCount Address High Address Mid Address Low Oddddddd DD Data Check sum 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to Table 1 2 gt Table 1 8 gt pages 157 162 The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count Address Data and Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump Bulk Request will be received The Block is a unit that consists of the data arranged in the list as the Total Size The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received These are transmitted only
176. e Reg Pad Regist Style Pad step 5 is not necessary Pro ceed from step 6 Disk Operations 6 Execute the Load Operation Press the YES button and the load operation will start Once started the operation can t be canceled As the file is loading Now Loading will appear on the top line of the display When the load operation is finished the display will return to the Load From Disk YES sub menu If you aren t going to load press the NO button instead of the Y ES button or eject the disk The display will return back to the previous Load From Disk YES You can copy the entire data saved on a floppy disk onto another one using the disk copy feature It s a good idea to use disk copy to create backup disks of your important data 1 Insert the Disk to Copy From Source Disk into the Disk Drive Insert the disk that you want to copy from source disk into the disk drive 2 Select a Disk Copy Function Use the MENU A and F buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to DISK to the left of the display Use the SUB MENU A and F buttons so that Disk Copy YES appears on the display SUB MENU NOTE When data is loaded from a floppy disk to the PSR 730 630 the data already in the memory of the instru ment will be replaced by the data on the disk Save important da
177. e lt sew 047 CARIBBEAN ot PIANO umm PPE 212 251 PIANO Sms STRINGS Su SMOD J lon Wet 7 RODAROLL 087 SALLROOM LATIN Sis 100 HOM 088 100 SOLOSTRNGS 164 181 SYNTHLEAD 211 Omoumo 308 aaa 54258 SYNTH EFFECTS 020 022 S SALLAD 060 COUNTRYAWESTERN 086 091 BALLROOM STANDARD PERCUSSION 1o 18 ENSEMBLE 382 SYNTH PRD PERCUSSION 425 486 Sao Ge EDO 3 00 00 DANCE 001 088 TRADITIONAL JAZZ 0 995 MARCH ORGAN DIEN E ES 201 12 DRUMS ORGAN 20 2 PERCUSSIVE 3 0600 tib CONTEMPORARY 086 100 WALTZ 082 087 ACCORDION 107 140 BRASS ENSEMBLE GUTAR mi SOUND EFFECTS 08 ROCK LAT 038 07 GUTAR 2 RED 022 BASS i asmo To Q S a reser DIGITAL EFFECT y Teneo ee ESTHER up JIO se 5 Qo n 2 i TRANSPOSE SS L wem M TN LE 22 j e 17 pu 1 mo o eves t KEYBOARD 1 ICE DUALVOICE eX ii au sy OO mesm 2 U Man ove TOUCH serie ommo 5 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MULTI PAD 1 1 2 3 4 freeze 1 2 3 4
178. e Ef Parameter List 03 0n 40 2 00 7F Ins Param 9 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 9 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 03 0n 42 2 00 7F Ins Param 10 MSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List 00 7F Ins Param 10 LSB Refer to the Ef Parameter List TOTAL SIZE 14 For effect types that do not require MSB the Parameters for Address 02 0B will be received Address 30 42 will not be received For effect types that require MSB the Parameters for Address 30 42 will be received Address 02 0 will not be received When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted the Parameters for Address 02 OB will always be transmitted But effects that require MSB when the bulk dump is received the Parameters for Address 02 OB will not be received n Insertion Effect No 0 1 lt Table 1 7 gt MIDI Parameter Change table MULTI PART Address H 08 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0 10 11 Size H eee Data H 00 00 00 00 00 TF 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 7 7 7 OF 01 02 7F 7 7 7 7F TF Prameter Name Element Reserve Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Number Rev Channel Mono Poly Mode Same Note Numb
179. e by pressing both the TEMPO V and A buttons simultaneously or by pressing the and buttons simulta neously while the tempo value is showing on the top line of the display The Beat Indicator When Auto Accompaniment or song playback is started the four dots of the BEAT indicator provide a visual indication of the selected tempo as shown below 4 4 time 3 4 time istbeat e e RE 2ndbeat e e e e e e e 4thbeat e e Auto Accompaniment Accompaniment Sections There are 8 types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing They are Intro Main A and B Fill in AA AB BA BB and Ending By switching between them while playing you can put together a single song MAIN AUTO FILL O INTRO O A B OENDING INTRO Section This is the beginning of the song When the intro finishes playing accompa niment shifts to the main section MAIN Section There are two variations that can play in the main section of the song A and B The Auto Accompaniment will automatically play following along with the chords that you play FILL IN Section Fill in livens up pauses in the song Whenever you press the MAIN AUTO FILL A or B button during accompaniment the PSR 730 630 will generate an appropriate fill in one of four types AA AB BA and BB which will smoothly connect th
180. e current section to the selected section even if itis the same section ENDING Section This is the ending portion of the song When the ending is finished Auto Accompaniment will stop NOTE The MAIN A section is automatically selected whenever the PSR 730 630 power is initially turned on The indicator of the desti nation section MAIN A or B will flash while the corresponding fill in is playing During this time you can change the des tination section by press ing the appropriate MAIN AUTO FILL A or B button You can use the intro section even in the middle of the song by pressing the INTRO but ton during the song If the MAIN AUTO FILL A B button is pressed af ter the final half beat eighth note of the mea sure fill in will begin from the next measure You can begin the ac companiment by using the ending instead of the intro section Auto Accompaniment Accompaniment Track Muting The PSR 730 630 has eight accompaniment tracks RHYTHM 1 RHYTHM 2 NOTE j BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 that you can control to modify the orchestration and therefore the overall sound of the accompa es volume and 2 other parameters niment When a style is selected the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain can be changed by data for any section of that style will light function page Individual accompaniment tracks can be
181. e current tempo of accompani ment song playback page 26 TRANSPOSE The current transpose value page 56 ACMP SONG VOLUME In Song Style Mode page 11 the ac companimentor song volume is displayed pagse 29 78 REPEAT Indicates the A and B repeat points when programming a repeat section and whether REPEAT PLAY is on or off page 80 ONE TOUCH SETTING Appears when the ONE TOUCH SET TING feature is engaged page 41 REGISTRATION 1 4 Registration Memory Indicates the currently selected REGIS TRATION MEMORY or ONE TOUCH SETTING number page 57 FREEZE Appears when the REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE function is on page 60 MEASURE Indicates the current measure number during song recording and playback page 78 BEAT Flashes at the current tempo and indi cates the current beat during accompa niment and song playback page 26 MULTI PAD 1 4 Indicates the currently playing MULTI PAD numbers page 62 m ES DIGITAL EQ PSR 730 Appears when the DIGITAL EQUALIZER is turned on page 51 MULTI EFFECT PSR 730 Appears when the MULTI EFFECT is turned on page 49 REVERB Appears when the PSR 730 630 REVERB effect is turned on page 43 CHORUS Appears when the CHORUS effect is turned on page 44 DSP Appears when the DSP effect is turned on page 45 DSP VARIATION Appears when the DSP VARIATION effect is turned on page 46
182. e display and recording will stop the re hearsal mode will be en The style will repeat continuously when recording is started so you can gaged continue to add overdub notes until the current track is complete The style recording with the user style should be recorded based on a CM7 chord C Major Seven in order for it to memory space thoroughly function properly when used for auto accompaniment consumed Full will be shown on the display and the recording will forcibly be stopped In this case first exit from the record mode next select the unnecessary chord tone user style and then enter C S C C S C C S scale tones the record mode again and execute the Clear function see page 105 to secure the free space to record 9 MULTI PAD Even though you can start Style Recording Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks i e C D E G A and B Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks i e C E G and B Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord The default source chord is set as CM7 but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you to play For details see Refining User Styles with Style File Format page 148 9 Stop Reco
183. e return level The CHORUS ON OFF status will be set automatically accord ing to the selected R1 panel voice Shortcut You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT Chorus func tion by pressing and holding the CHORUS button for a few sec onds NOTE When you select a different Style the appropriate Chorus type will be selected accordingly Some of the Styles contain Cho rus types which cannot be se lected on the PSR 730 630 In this case XG Chorus will be displayed when you select the SUB MENU Chorus of the DIGI TAL EFFECT If you don t want to apply the Chorus effect to Styles or Songs select 10 OFF from the Chorus types or set the Chorus Return Level to 0 In either case no Chorus will be applied to the en tire system If you use the Revoice function you can set the Chorus Depth for each track of the Style independently see page 110 Digital Effects If you press the DSP button the DSP icon will light up and the DSP effect will be turned on After setting the DSP type the effect will be applied when you play the R1 R2 and L voice from the keyboard DSP m REVERB CHORUS VARIATION Select the DSP Type The PSR 730 630 features an extensive range of 46 DSP Digital Signal Processor NOTE effects There are two types of digital effects system effects and insertion effects The The DSP effect and illustration below will give you an id
184. e therefore the owners responsibility Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi ronmentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them meet these goals In keep ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law we want you to be aware of the following Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargeable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years When replacement becomes nec essary contact a qualified service representative to perform the re placement This product may also use household type batteries Some of these may be rechargeable Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged When installing batteries do not mix batteries with new or with batter ies of a different type Batteries MUST be installed correctly Mis matches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture Warning Do not attempt to disassemble or incinerate any battery Keep all batteries away from children Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area Note Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for bat
185. e to initiate recording from the middle of the song If you wantto change the latter half of the song track select the Measure number from which you want to record and start recording When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is on this method is not available for the quick recording procedure 9 Exit From the Record Mode ENDING You can also press the SYNC START button to stop record ing and return to the record ready mode 5 NOTE While the record ready mode is en gaged you can press the VOICE button to go to the VOICE menu and change the H1 voice as required The R2 voice how ever cannot be changed If the Voice Set function is on page 116 the R2 voice will automati cally be changed when an H1 panel voice is selected The record ready mode must be disen gaged in order to change the R2 voice and other settings You can rerecord a part of an already re corded track if de sired using the Punch In Punch Out feature page 92 When you re finished recording a song press the RECORD button so that its NOTE D indicator goes out to exit from the record mode The recorded user song can now be played back in the same way as the demonstration songs RECORD X You can edit the data recorded in user songs page 96 You can edit the re corded accompani ment data recorded on accompaniment tracks page 96 Song Recording Multi Recording Procedure With
186. ea of how DSP effects work centering on the variation settings may change according to mixer the selected R1 panel voice Shortcut y System Effect e You can also jump di rectly to the DIGITAL Le OHH H3 EFFECT DSP func tion by pressing and holding the DSP but RETURN ton for a few seconds Depth 00000000 00 99000099 T 990000909 99090000909 990009090909 909 9 9 Speaker System Effect Applies to all of the parts input to the mixer You can set the DSP Depth and DSP Return Level The System Effect includes Reverb and Chorus types DSP Depth cannot be modified for some In sertion effects In this Insertion Effect case the display shows indicat Applies only to a designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer You can ing acess effectively use the digital effects by applying the effect to the specific part With sible the Insertion Effect you can only designate the DSP Depth The Insertion Effect includes Distortion and Tremolo See page 143 About Digital Effects and the Type List Digital Effects Use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT Then use the SUB MENU A and W buttons to select DSP After a few
187. ead or write operation i e while the disk drive is operating Doing so can damage both the disk and the drive Never turn the power ON or OFF while a disk is in the drive Always eject the disk before turning the power OFF To eject a floppy disk from the disk drive press the eject button slowly as far as it will go Then when the disk is fully ejected remove it by hand The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough the eject button may become stuck halfway with the disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters If this is the case do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk Doing so may damage the disk drive mechanism and or the floppy disk To remove a partially ejected disk try pressing the eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot then repeat the eject procedure carefully This lamp is always on when the power is on regardless of Disk operation Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive Other objects can damage the disk drive or floppy disk Neveropenthe disk shutter by hand ortouch the internal surface of the disk Dirt dust or grease on the disk s magnetic surface can cause data errors Neverleave disks near a speaker TV or other device that emits a strong magnetic field Strong magnetic fields can partially erase the data on the disk Do not store disks in places exposed to
188. ed in step 4 was Style or Regist press the SUB MENU button so that the sub menu Source load data selection screen is By setting the source and destination the data can be individually loaded or loaded as a group Style A single Style can be extracted from the file 4 Styles saved together on the disk and loaded into one of the PSR 730 630 User Style 101 104 Pad A single bank can be extracted from the file 4 banks saved together on the disk and loaded into one of the PSR 730 630 User Pad banks 37 40 Regist A single bank can be extracted from the file 32 banks saved together on the disk and loaded into one of the PSR 730 630 Registration banks 1 32 File Type Source Destination Style Style 1 4 All Style 1 4 User Style 101 104 Pad Pad bank 1 4 All Pad bank 1 4 User Pad 37 40 Regist Regist bank 1 32 All Reg bank 1 32 Source Selection Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the load source If All is selected all the data will be loaded Press the SUB MENU F button so that Destination appears on the display Use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to select the destination for the data Press the SUB MENU WVF button so that Execute NO YES load execution screen appears on the display When the selected file type is All Styl
189. een selected as the section for recording MAIN AUTO FILL INTRO O A O B O ENDING PIP CE At the bottom of the display the RHYTHMI track bar will appear not flashing This shows that has been selected as the recording track na I nu all BASS CHORD CHORD PAD PHRASE PHRASE e 6 Select a Track to Record When using a preset style as a basis for a user style the BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 tracks must be cleared before they can be selected for recording see page 105 The RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks can be overdubbed i e new notes can be added without erasing the original data Use the TRACK buttons to select RHYTHM 1 BASS CHORD 1 2 PAD or PHRASE 1 2 as the style track you want to record NOTE Multiple sections can not be recorded at the same time If you don t specifi cally select a section the MAIN A section will automatically be selected for recording Although the preset FILL sections have 4 variations refer to page 27 user style FILL sections can have only 1 When using a preset style as a basis for a user style the AA FILL variation is used NOTE D Only one track can be recorded at a time f you don t specifi cally select a track the RHYTHM 1 track will automatically be selected when you start recording Style Recording e 19 386 RHYTHM R
190. el 16 Multi ulti Effect PSR 730 DRY LINE Q The Digital Effect List About Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP No Effect Type Features REVERB 01 04 1 4 System Concert hall reverb 05 08 Room1 4 System Small room reverb 09 10 Stage1 2 System Reverb for solo instruments 11 12 Plate1 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb 13 OFF No effect CHORUS 01 05 Chorus1 5 System Conventional chorus program with rich warm chorusing 06 09 Flanger1 4 System Pronounced three phase modulation with a slight metallic sound 10 OFF No effect DSP 01 04 1 4 System Concert hall reverb 05 08 Room1 4 System Small room reverb 09 10 Stage1 2 System Reverb for solo instruments 11 12 Plate1 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb 13 14 Early Reflection1 2 System Early reflections only 15 Gate Reverb System Gated reverb effect in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special effects 16 Reverse Gate System Similar to Gate Reverb but with a reverse increase in reverb 17 21 Chorus1 5 System Conventional chorus program with rich warm chorusing 22 25 Flanger1 4 System Pronounced three phase modulation with slight metallic sound 26 Symphonic System Exceptionally rich amp deep chorusing 27 Phaser System Pronounced metallic modulation with periodic phase change 28 32 Rotary Speaker 1 5 Insertion Rotary
191. elected accompaniment style all you have to do is select a style and play page 40 5 730 The Groove amp Dynamics function lets you individualize your arrangement of any style of music page 35 u multi function LCD display panel makes it easy to select and edit parameters WV The functional layout of the track buttons below the panel display makes operation easy 222 559 Registration Memory saves your favorite panel settings for instant recall when needed page 57 Minus one and Repeat functions are ideal for learning new songs and polishing your key board technique page 79 9 effects chorus DSP and harmony add depth and ambiance to your sound page 42 V PSR 730 The Multi Effect function lets you combine two digital effects page 48 PSR 730 N With the Digital Equalizer you can fine tune the sound of your performance on five differ ent frequency bands page 51 Songrecording feature makes it easy to record and playback four melody tracks with an accompaniment track page 83 557 A A total of sixteen tracks can be recorded with the Multi recording function including key board harmony and accompaniment page 88 55 34 original accompaniment styles with the User Style feature you can also establish your own rules for changing pitch based on chord changes page 98 N GENERAL GM Syst
192. em Level 1 GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM compatible tone generator regardless of manufacturer The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support the GM System Level 1 PSR 730 630 supports GM System Level 1 T Packing List 5 0 ae Pads record and play short rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your performances page 106 i floppy disk drive plays XG disks and lets you easily manage User Song User Style User Pad and Registration data page 64 range of MIDI functions for expanded musical enjoyment XG format compatible and a TO HOST terminal for easy connection to a per sonal computer page 121 D o templates for easy MIDI settings page 129 XG XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which significantly improves and expands upon the GM Sys tem Level 1 standard by providing a greater variety of high quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect operation while being fully compatible with GM PSR 730 630 supports the XG format Please check that these items are packed with your PSR 730 630 PSR 730 630 e Sample Disk Music Stand page 7 Owner s manual Panel Controls 6 Digital Effects 42 The Music Stand
193. ending is finished If you press a MAIN AUTO FILL A B button while the ending is play ing fill in accompaniment will immediately start play ing continuing with the main section If you press the SYNC START while an accom paniment is playing the accompaniment will stop and the PSR 730 630 will enter Synchronized Start standby status Auto Accompaniment Changing Tempo You can change the tempo for accompaniment or song playback When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing the default tempo for that style is also selected and the tempo is displayed immediately above TEMPO in the display in quarter note beats per minute If the accompaniment is playing the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute however by using the TEMPO W and A buttons Press either button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo value by one or hold the button for continuous decrementing or incrementing TEMPO e 7 E s 5 x o c ca 2 5 9 5 When either of the TEMPO buttons is pressed the current tempo value will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds during this time the and buttons number buttons or data dial can also be used to set the tempo The default tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any tim
194. er Key On Assign Part Mode Note Shift Detune Volume Velocity Sense Depth Velocity Sense Offset Pan Note Limit Low Note Limit High Dry Level Chorus Send Description 0 32 0 127 0 127 1 128 0 16 1 16 127 0ff 0 mono 1 poly O single 1 multi 2 inst for DRUM O normal 1 3 drum thru drum1 2 24 24 semitones 12 8 12 7 2 Ist bit3 0 gt bit7 4 2nd bit3 0 gt bit3 0 0 127 0 127 0 127 O random L63 C R63 1 64 127 C 2 G8 C 2 G8 0 127 0 127 Default Value H O Part10 2 Others 7F Part10 00 Others 00 00 Part No 01 00 00 Except Part10 01 Part10 40 08 00 80 64 40 40 40 00 7F 7F 00 Address H nn 13 nn 14 nn 15 nn 16 nn 17 nn 18 nn 19 nn 1 nn 1B nn nn 1 nn 1 nn IF nn 20 nn 21 nn 22 nn 23 nn 24 nn 25 nn 26 nn 27 nn 28 TOTAL SIZE 29 nn 30 nn 40 nn 41 nn 42 nn 43 nn 44 nn 45 nn 46 nn 47 nn 48 nn 49 nn 4A nn 4B nn 4C nn 4D nn 4E nn 4F nn 50 nn 51 nn 52 nn 53 66 nn 67 nn 68 nn 69 6E TOTAL SIZE 3F nn PartNumber If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part the following parameters are ineffective Bank Select LSB Pitch EG Size H Bee eee Bee eee Bee eee Portamento Soft Pedal Mono Poly Scale Tuning Data H 00 00 00
195. er a few sec onds NOTE j While the accompani ment volume setting appears on the top line of the display the and buttons number buttons or Data Dial can also be used to set the ac companiment volume Auto Accompaniment Changing the Accompaniment Split Point The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point the boundary point between the melody section and accompaniment section can be setto any key on the PSR 730 630 keyboard to match your individual playing requirements 1 Select the Accompaniment Split Point Function Use the MENU A and F buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to OVERALL on the left side of the display MENU Then use the SUB MENU A F buttons to select AcmpSplit function from within the OVERALL menu The MIDI note number corresponding to the current split point will appear to the right of AcmpSplit on the top line of the display MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS 2 Set As Required Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point The key number of the key you press will appear to the right of AcmpSplit on the top line of the display You can also use the and buttons number buttons or Data Dial to enter the split point key number The split point can be set at any key number from 0 through 127 BEA AA omg
196. everse Cymbal 29 FO Snare Roll Snare Roll 2 lt lt 30 F 0 Castanet lt Hi Q 31 GO Snare L Snare L 2 Snare M SD Rock H 32 G 0 Sticks lt 33 0 Bass Drum L Bass Drum H 4 Bass Drum M 34 A 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2 lt lt 35 BO Bass Drum M Bass Drum M 2 lt BD Rock BD Analog L 36 C1 Bass Drum H Bass Drum H 2 BD Room BD Gate BD Analog H 37 CH Side Stick lt lt lt Analog Side Stick 38 D1 Snare M SnareM2 SD Room L SD Rock L Analog Snare L 39 DH Hand Clap lt lt lt 40 E1 Snare H Snare H2 SD Room H Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare H 41 F1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 42 FRI 1 Hi Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 43 G1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 44 G 1 A Hi Hat Pedal lt Analog HH Closed 2 45 A1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 46 1 anl Hi Hat Open lt Analog HH Open 47 B1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 48 C2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 49 2 Crash Cymbal 1 lt Analog Cymbal 50 D2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 51 D 2 Ride Cymbal 1 lt 52 E2 Chinese Cymbal I 53 F2 Ride Cymbal Cup lt 54 F 2 Tambourine lt 55 G2 Splash Cymbal lt 56 G 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell 57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2 lt 58 2 Vibraslap lt 59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2 60 Bongo lt 61 C 3 Bongo L lt 62 D3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H 63 D 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M 64 E3 Conga L
197. ey are all set to appropriate volume levels Make sure you are using fingerings recognized by the selected fingering mode and are playing in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard Are you sure you re playing in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard Make sure that the Auto Accompaniment split point is set appropriately page 30 Are you playing chords that the PSR 730 630 can recognize see chord types on page 31 The Harmony function will not turn on Harmony cannot be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD fingering mode is selected or if a percussion kit voice is selected Select an appropriate fingering mode or voice Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to 0 page 115 Data Backup amp Initialization Data Backup Except for the data listed below all PSR 730 630 panel settings are reset to their initial settings whenever the power is turned on Registration Memory User Style Data User Pad Data MIDI Transmit Settings MIDI Receive Settings The data listed above can be backed up i e retained in memory as long as a working set of batteries is installed and you keep the following Off On procedure Turn the power OFF by pressing the STAND BY ON switch Unplug the DC output cable of the PA 6 from the DC IN 10 12V jack on the rear panel of the PSR 730 630 Then unplug the PA 6 Power A
198. ff and split point settings on the PSR 730 630 panel Chord The note on off messages received at the channel s set to Chord are recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section The chords to be detected depend on the fingering mode on the PSR 730 630 The chords will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on off and split point settings on the PSR 730 630 panel Local Control Local Control refers to the fact that normally the PSR 730 630 keyboard controls the internal tone generator allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard This situation is Local Control on since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard Local control can be turned off however so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard At the same time the internal tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels set to the Normal mode via the MIDI IN connector This means that while an external MIDI sequencer for example plays the PSR 730 630 internal voices an external tone generator can be played from the PSR 730 630 keyboard The default Local Control setting is MIDI Functions NOTE MIDI receive mode settings will be re tained even after turn ing the power off See page 152 for the de trails
199. ffect 2 on off REVERB gt R1 Voice reverb reverb return Dry Wet Dry Wet S A EFFI EFF2 T send chorus to reverb R2 Voice Effect 1 on off Effect 2 on off Dry Wet Dry Wet 2 CHORUS T EFFI 2 oice jp Effect on off Effect 2 on off cid OUT send variation to chorus 2 f send variation to reverb Digital All tracks that can Equalizer be revoiced PSR 730 Dry Wet Dry Wet 4 DSP Channel 1 EE y EE cu VARIATION Effect 1 on off Effect 2 on off i variation DSP Channel 16 return Multi Effect PSR 730 About Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect The three PSR 630 effects or the five PSR 730 effects will be connected as shown below Since the PSR 730 Multi Effect EFFECT 1 2 is an insertion effect it will be applied to only one part from among the R1 R2 L parts The signal will enter reverb and chorus according to the send level Depth set for each and the signal with the effect applied will be output according to the return level that is set The reverb and chorus send levels Depth are set for each part track with the Revoice mode The reverb and chorus return level value is set in common for all the parts The stereo panning is available for each
200. gage the style record mode without recording any data Style Recording Drum Cancel This function makes it possible to erase specific drum instruments from the RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks It s handy for example when you want to erase just the bass drum recorded on the RHYTHM 1 track While recording either the RHYTHM 1 or RHYTHM 2 track use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select Drum Cancel Then press the key on the key board corresponding to the instrument you want to wm Quantize Quantize can be used to align notes to the nearest specified beat to tighten up loose timing 1 With the style Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode engaged and the target style and its section selected use the SUB MENU A and buttons to select Quantize YES 2 Press the YES button to engage the quantize function or to abort The current quantize value will appear to the left of Quantize on the top line of the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the desired quantize value 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 When the quantize function is executed all notes in the target track will be aligned with the nearest note of the corresponding value Drum Cancel cannot be used for the BASS CHORD 1 2 PAD or PHRASE 1 2 tracks Style Recording Quantize Value Note 4 Quarter note d DASIDA 6 Quarter note triplet 8 Eighth
201. ged and the target Pad set selected use the SUB MENU A and W buttons so that Pad Naming appears on the display The current name for the Pad set will be displayed at the upper right of the display The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming page 58 Clearing User Pad Data This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR 730 630 MULTI PADs Clearing an Entire Pad Set While the MULTI PAD record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select the Bank Clear YES function then press the YES button Are You Sure NO YES will appear on the display Press the YES button a second time to actually clear the currently selected pad set the preset pad sets cannot be cleared Press NO if you want to abort the clear operation Clearing Selected MULTI PADs While the MULTI PAD record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the Clear function The MULTI PAD icons corresponding to pads which contain data will flash preset pad set data cannot be cleared Use the MULTI PAD buttons to select the pad you want to clear the icon corresponding to the selected pad will appear continuously on the display Are You Sure NO YES will appear on the display Press the YES button to actually clear the currently selected pad Press NO if you w
202. gethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts the power switch disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet and or modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immedi ately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel MS Re spe Yamaha only Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or instrument or overheating wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings Before cleaning the instrument always remove the electric plug from the outlet Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands e f the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is e Check a sudden loss of
203. ght up and the Chorus effect will be turned on After setting the Chorus type the effect will be applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard ann Ava REVERB CHORUS DSP Selecting a Chorus Type Select one of the 10 Chorus types Use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT MENU MDT gi Then use the SUB MENU A V buttons to select Chorus The name of the currently selected Chorus type will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the Chorus Type List on page 145 use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired Chorus effect from 1 10 DIGITAL EFFECT 4 OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Chorus Return Level The Cho Return Chorus Return Level parameter sets the amount of chorus effect returned from the chorus effect stage thus making it possible to adjust the degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound Use the MENU A and F buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT then use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select Cho Return Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to set the desired chorus return level the current return level value appears to the right of Cho Return on the display The range is from 0 to 127 The higher the value the greater th
204. gram A s dih 1 b f h benl d h change numbers for each voice Use ccompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the these program charge numbers when keyboard is correspondingly reduced The same applies to the Dual Voice playing the PSR 730 630 via MIDI from an external device Split Voice Multi Pad and Song functions When the sustain or sostenuto pedal When the maximum polyphony is exceeded notes are played using last functions are being used page 117 note priority some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the pedal is held PSR 730 Panel Voice List Bank Select MIDI Bank Select MIDI Voice Program Voice Name Program Voice Name Number MSB 15 Change Number MSB 15 Change Number Number Piano 52 0 112 19 Pipe Organ 1 0 112 0 Grand Piano 53 0 113 19 ChapelOrgan 2 0 112 1 BrightPiano 54 0 112 20 Reed Organ 3 0 112 3 Honky Tonk Accordion 4 0 112 2 Midi Grand 55 0 112 21 Musette 5 0 113 2 CP 80 56 0 115 21 Accordion 6 0 114 4 Galaxy EP 57 0 113 21 Trad Accrd 7 0 117 5 Super DX 58 0 112 23 Tango Accrd 8 0 112 5 DX Modern 59 0 113 23 Bandoneon 9 0 112 4 Funk EP 60 0 114 21 Soft Accrd 10 0 115 5 Modern EP 61 0 112 22 Harmonica
205. hanged but the style data will change to the user style set tings values Digital Effects With the digital effects built into the PSR 730 630 you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety of ways such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall or adding harmony notes for a full rich sound With the PSR 730 you can take advantage of even more sophisticated features like the Multi Effect function that lets apply several effects together or the Digital Equalizer that lets you adjust volume for each of 5 frequency bands Digital Effects REVERB Button REVERB CHORUS Button CHORUS DSP Button DSP PSR 730 MULTI EFFECT Button PSR 730 DIGITAL EQ Button DIGITAL EQ HARMONY Button HARMONY You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in places like a concert hall or live in a club You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing sound as though multiple parts were being played to gether at the same time In addition to the reverb and chorus types the effects usually used to a specific part such as the distortion and tremolo can be selected You can apply reverb chorus or DSP effects to particular parts or combine them together You can apply volume adjustments to the output of the PSR 730 to five different frequency bands enhancing the impression your music gives You can add a varie
206. he START STOP button will start accompaniment playback Currently selected style name and style t PLE PUR Ibo PLI OP i E cs ecce TEMPO REPEAT MEASURE BEAT TRANSPOSE ALONE REGISTRATION MEMORY MULTI PAD i 5 j eee ul bi 6 mE i8 S LE 219 219 355 331 338 352 84 109 i m m me PAD PHRASE aE E Mw f 5 98 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK JE R2 R1 Information for accompaniment tracks 1 8 Song Mode Pressing the START STOP button will start song playback Currently selected icd mp j song song i number nn l REPEAT MEASURE BEAT ACMP SONG TRANSPOSE VOLUME REGISTRATION MEMORY MULTI PAD mee 9 dd DIGITALEQ EFFECT REVERB CHORUS HARMONY SYNCSTOP FINGERING GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Song volume P lt gt lt gt gt gt p lt gt gt gt b gt gt 813012232738 259 434 468 He 411218252012 2013 213 213 213 L 1 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 R1 Information for song tracks 1 16 When in Song Mode AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT ON OFF SYNC START SYNC STOP and other buttons con nected with accompaniment will not function Shortcut gt Shortcuts To make operation as easy and as efficient as possible the PSR 730 630 features a number of shortcuts which allow you to jump directly to certain functions without having to use the MENU and SUB MENU buttons All of these shortcuts work in the
207. he SUB MENU A and V buttons to select Naming The current name will appear on the top right of the display Any data that was previously recorded in the Registration Memory location you selected will be erased and replaced by the new settings The Registration Memory contents will be retained even after turning the power off See page 152 for the details Registration Memory Referring to the information below use the 1 0 number buttons the buttons or the Data Dial to enter the name Dis cincta Select letter cursor moves right Select letter cursor moves left Dial Change Character 1 1 0 Jump entry Character List When entering letters with the Dial Lower case letters ue P MEE can t be entered with Wo 2 oo 265 fF om og the naming function When doing jump entry with the 1 0 number buttons 1 I HH FO ER 2 T L The same method can be used to give your own names to user songs page 94 user pads page 109 or user styles page 104 Registration Memory Recall the Registered Panel Settings Simply select the appropriate bank as described above then press the desired REGISTRATION MEMORY button at any time to recall the memorized settings The corresponding Registration Memory number will appear above REGISTRATION in the display and the appropriate setting cha
208. his means you can specify on bass chords in which the main bass note for the chord is not the root of the chord For a C major chord for example you could use E the third or G the fifth as the bass note rather than C ConE ConG Hmm mmm mmm The FULL KEYBOARD Mode Full Key When the FULL KEYBOARD Mode is selected the PSR 730 630 will auto matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both hands anywhere on the keyboard You do not have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords The name of the detected chord will appear in the display NOTE When the FULL KEY BOARD mode is se lected the split point set ting see page 30 for the auto accompaniment will be ignored Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th note intervals Extremely short chords less than an 8th note in length may not be detected Auto Accompaniment The MULTI FINGER Mode Multi e This is the default accompaniment mode The MULTI FINGER mode auto matically detects SINGLE FINGER or FINGERED 1 chord fingerings so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes The Stop Accompaniment Function While the SINGLE FINGER FINGERED 1 FINGERED 2 or MULTI FIN GER mode is selected chords played in the AUTO ACCOMPNIMENT section of the keyboard are also detected and
209. htmost TRACK buttons to select the voice you want to revoice L R2 or R1 The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars en cS A VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 L R2 R1 3 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters Use the SUB MENU A and buttons to select the desired parameter The name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the right of the parameter s current value Use the and buttons the number buttons or the data dial to set the parameter s value as required Refer to the Revoice Parameters chart on page 111 4 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to revoice the voices as required then press the REVOICE button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE eh REVOICE Revoicing The TRACK button below the selected voice can be used to turn the voice on or off Make sure that the voice is turned on if you want to monitor the sound while revoicing the R1 voice cannot be turned off Shortcut You can jump directly to the REVOICE R2 VOICE dis play by pressing and hold ing the DUAL VOICE but ton for a few seconds You can jump directly to the REVOICE L VOICE display by pressing and holding the SPLIT VOICE button for a few seconds NOTE Minus settings for the Oc tave and Pan parameters can be directly entered by pressing the appropriate num
210. ice HighMidGain 4 0 kHz to the PSR 730 630 see page 156 HighGain 8 0 kHz The digital equalizer adjusts the gain amplitude change in each of the 5 frequency bands within a range of 12 to 0 to 12 decibels dB Try listening to each of the five preset equalizer settings and compare them A Using the Digital Equalizer PSR 730 If you press the DIGITAL EQ button the DIGITAL EQ icon will light up and the Digital EQ effect will be turned on After setting the Digital EQ type the equalizer effect will be applied to the overall output of the PSR 730 DIGITAL EQ Q IE un Digital Effects Selecting a Digital EQ Type Select one of the 5 Digital EQ types Shortcut A You can jump directl Use the MENU F and A buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display to the EQ 5 next to DIGITAL EFFECT menu of the DIGITAL EFFECTS menu by MENU MIDI pressing and holding the DIGITAL EQ but DIGITAL EFFECT 4 ton for a few seconds OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS v Then use the SUB MENU VW and A buttons to select Type The name of the currently selected Digital EQ type will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the Equalizer Type List below use the and buttons the 1 5 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired equalizer type SUB MENU EB Equalizer List
211. ist Each percussion voice uses one note indicates that the drum kit is the same as Standard Kit1 The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than the MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the list For example the note number and note name 36 and C1 on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and note name 24 and CO shown in the list Voices with the same Alternate Note Number 1 4 cannot be played simultaneously PSR 730 Voice 217 218 219 220 221 PSR 630 Voice 202 203 204 205 206 Bank MSB 127 127 127 127 127 Bank LSB 0 0 0 0 0 Program Changes 1 8 16 24 25 Note MIDI Note Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit 13 3 73 Surdo Mute 14 D 1 3 Surdo Open 15 D 1 Hi Q 16 E 1 i 17 1 4 Scratch Push 18 1 74 Scratch Pull 19 G 1 Finger Snap 20 1 Click Noise 21 A 1 Metronome Click 22 1 Metronome Bell 23 B 1 Seq Click L 24 co Seq Click H 25 C 0 Brush Tap 26 DO Brush Swirl L 27 D 0 Brush Slap lt 28 EO Brush Swirl H lt Reverse Cymbal R
212. itar note production Digital instrument note production ue Wy RE NEA Note Note Wr Playing the keyboard Wh Pluck a string and the body resonates the Based on playing information from the keyboard a Sound sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers As shown in the illustration above in an electronic instrument the sampling note previously recorded note stored in the tone generator section electronic circuit is played based on information received from the keyboard So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production For example let s say you play a quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR 730 630 keyboard Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as with what voice with which key about how strong when was it pressed and when was it released Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator Using these numbers as a basis the tone generator plays the stored sampling note Example of Keyboard Information Voice number with what voice 01 grand piano Note number with which key 60 C3 Note on when was it pressed and Timing expressed numerically quarter note note off when was it released Velocity about how strong 120 strong
213. itch connected to the SUSTAIN jack Pedal 1 and the foot controller connected to the FOOT VOL jack Pedal 2 on the rear panel Select the Functions to Be Controlled by the Pedals Select one of the 16 functions that can be controlled by Pedal 1 and one of the 24 functions that can be controlled by Pedal 2 Pedal Function List Pedal 1 2 Functions SUSTAIN When you step on the foot switch sustain is applied to the keyboard notes SOSTENUTO When you step on the foot switch the sostenuto effect is applied to the keyboard notes SOFT When you step on the foot switch the soft effect is applied to the keyboard notes REGIST When you step on the foot switch a register with one number higher is recalled For example if you step on the foot switch with bank 1 3 recalled 1 4 will be recalled then next 1 1 will be recalled REGIST When you step on the foot switch a register with one number lower is recalled For example if you step on the foot switch with bank 3 2 recalled 3 1 will be recalled then next 3 4 will be recalled TAP TEMPO When the accompaniment is stopped including synchro start standby stepping on the switch the number of beats in a measure will cause the tempo value to be set at the actual speed at which you tapped the switch and the accompaniment will start For 3 4 time tap three times and for 4 4 time tap 4 times The tempo can be set in a range from 32 280 STAR
214. ive or 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111110 Universal Non Realtime Oxxxnnnn XN When N is received N 0 F whichever is received When N is transmitted N always 0 X don t care 00001001 09 Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 General MIDI On 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive Depending upon the received ON message the System Mode will be changed to XG Except MIDI Master Tuning all control data be reset to default values This message requires approximately 50ms to execute so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent 3 6 3 XG STANDARD 3 6 3 1 XG PARAMETER CHANGE 3 6 3 1 1 XG SYSTEM ON binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn IN Device Number 01001100 4C Model ID 00000000 00 Address High 00000000 00 Address Mid 01111110 7E Address Low 00000000 00 Data 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive Depending upon the received ON message the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to XG Controllers will be reset all values of Multi Part and Effect and All System values denoted by XG data within All System will be reset to default values in the table This message requires approximately 50ms to execute so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent 3 6 3 1 2 XG PARMETER CHANGE binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn IN Device Number 01001100 4C Model ID Ad
215. k 1 14860 1 TypeA TypeB 0 1 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 2 Room Size 0 1 20 0 0 127 table 6 2 Rch Delay 0 1 1486 0ms variation block 1 14860 3 Diffusion 0 10 0 10 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 4 Initial Delay 0 127 0 127 table 5 3 Cch Delay 0 1 1486 0ms variation block 1 14860 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 6 HPF Cutoff Thru 8 0kHz 0 52 table 3 4 Feedback Delay 0 1 1486 0ms variation block 1 14860 7 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 8 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 9 6 Cch Level 0 127 0 127 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 e 7 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 8 11 Liveness 0 10 0 10 9 12 Density 0 3 0 3 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D W63 1 127 13 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 14 11 15 12 16 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 14 EQ Low Gain 12 12dB 52 76 KARAOKE1 2 3 variation insertion block 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 No Parameter Value See Table Control 16 EQ High Gain 212 1208 pene 1 Delay Time 0 127 0 127 table 7 M 2 Feedback Level 63 6 1 127 DELAY L R variation insertion block 3 HPF Cutoff EIS EHE 0 52 table 3 No Parameter Value See Table Control 4 LPF Cutoff 1 0k Thru 34 60 table 3 1 Lch Delay 0 1 1486 0ms variation block 1 14860 5 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 6 2 Rch Delay 0 1 1486 0ms varia
216. kup 152 Insertion Effect 45 144 Intro 27 Keyboard percussion eese 19 C 127 EM 70 Main A amp Main B sections 27 Master tuning iieri iecit 115 Measure Groove 37 Measure song play from specified 78 Melody tracks clearing 94 Melody tracks song asn 84 Menu structure 130 MODUS d iL 10 Ni Ti rejare nme 116 MIDI connectors 4444 121 MID Gata formal iioii iocis et irte tette 153 ci coto eto titres 125 MIDI implementation 168 MIDI 129 practice socer eire cenis 79 Modulation wheel 55 Multi effe E cte Ere batter 48 Multi finger fingering mode 35 Multi pad set selection 61 Multi Pads playing 2 8 62 Music stand ere PP 7 Note On Offscse ntis p m iles itus teu 120 On bass 34 One touch
217. laying the PSR 730 630 The Split Voice Mode The SPLIT VOICE mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands wr The split point forms a boundary on the keyboard with the R voice playing on the The L voice settings right side and the L voice on the left voice parameters can be changed as required by using the REVOICE function described on page murmmmmimmm The split point can be L Split Point changed as required as described below The SPLIT VOICE mode is engaged by pressing the SPLIT VOICE button When turned on the L icon in the display will light in addition to the R1 or R1 and R2 icons Press the SPLIT VOICE button a second time to disengage the SPLIT VOICE mode the L icon will go out leaving only the R voice SPLIT VOICE In the Syle mode the L TRACK button below the display third from the right can also be used to turn the L voice on or off as required co cS Sill o m lt 8 al o 2 Sill o m 84 108 i Playing the PSR 730 630 Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point The SPLIT VOICE split point can be set to any key on the PSR 730 630 keyboard to match your individual playing requirements 1 Select the SPLIT VOICE Split Point Function Use the MENU A and F buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to OVERALL on the left side of the display MENU y X Then use the SUB MENU
218. lect a Track to Revoice Usethe TRACK buttons to select the accompaniment track you want to revoice RHYTHM 1 RHYTHM 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE 1 or PHRASE 2 The selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK NOTE The STYLE REVOICE mode can even be se lected by pressing the REVOICE button while an accompaniment is playing The STYLE REVOICE mode cannot be selected while one of the record modes is engaged The STYLE REVOICE mode cannot be selected while a voice is being revoiced during song play back The Registration Memory Freeze function will auto matically be turned on when entering the Style Revoice Mode Style revoicing affects all sections of the selected style NOTE The TRACK button below the selected track can be used to turn the track on or off Make sure that the track is turned on if you want to monitor the sound while revoicing Only drum kits see page 19 can be selected for the RHYTHM 1 track Any voice can be selected for the RHYTHM 2 track but please note that the RHYTHM 2 track is not af fected by the AUTO AC COMPANIMENT feature The OCTAVE parameter and the DSP depth cannot be edited in the STYLE REVOICE mode Revoicing 4 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters Use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select the desired parameter The wr p name ofthe selected parameter will appear on the top
219. ll appear in the top of the display While the track is being cleared Now Deleting is dis played never eject the floppy disk or turn off the power to the PSR 730 630 When track clear is finished the display will return to Track Clear If you press the NO button track clear will not be executed and the display will return to Track Clear Song Recording Clearing an Entire Song Use the song selection sub menu pages 85 88 to be sure that you have selected the song that you want to clear While the SONG record ready or rehearsal mode page 87 is engaged use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select the Song Clear YES function Press the Y ES button and Are You Sure NO YES will appear on the display Press the YES button a second time to actually clear the currently selected user song While the song is being cleared Now Deleting will appear at the top of the display When the operation is finished the display will show Song Clear Press NO if you want to abort the clear operation The display will return to Song Clear YES Song Edit The data in user songs can be edited in a way similar to using the Revoice function for Voices and Styles page 110 The edited data can be written into the user song data 1 While the SONG record ready or rehearsal mode page 87 is engaged use the SUB MENU A buttons t
220. ll the wheel away from you or down roll the wheel toward you while playing the keyboard The pitch bend wheel is self centering and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released PITCH BEND The maximum pitch bend range can be set via the PITCH BEND RANGE function in the OVERALL function group Use the MENU and A buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to OVERALL MENU Then use the SUB MENU WV and A buttons to select Range The current J z s When the Voice Set pitch bend range setting will appear to the right of the function name on the top line function is ON page of the display Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial 116 the Pitch Bend to set the pitch bend range from 01 to 12 as required Each increment corresponds Range willbe changed according to to one semitone the selected R1 panel voice e The default pitch bend ZEE m range can be instantly FPES rs recalled by pressing the and buttons simultaneously The Modulation Wheel PSR 730 The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard R1 R2 L voices Rolling the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth of the effect while rotating it away from yourself increases it MODULATION NOTE A In order to avoid acci dentally applying modulation when you don t
221. lly starting the accompaniment by pressing the SYNC START button a second time AUTO ya SYNC STOP O START INTRO OENDING N When the AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point are set at different keys the L voice can be played be tween the AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point when the AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT function is on When the AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point are set to the same key the L voice can be played any where to the left of the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point while AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is not playing Auto Accompaniment Play the Melody with the Accompaniment As soon as you play any chord that the PSR 730 630 can recognize on the left hand section ofthe keyboard the PSR 730 630 will automatically begin to play the chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line The name of the current chord will appear on the display VOICE MULTI PAD qm gt Wy FINGERING mM7 GROOVE amp DYNAMICS The chord will be recognized according to the rules set in the Fingering Mode Forthe method for entering chords see page 32 Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes The Auto Accompaniment will continue playing even if the left hand releases the keys As you press each chord in the song you can play the melody along with the accomp
222. mati cally change when a panel voice is selected for R1 XG Ins may ap pear on the display if you play back the songs containing Multi Effect settings NOTE The dry wet settings cannot be done for some of the Effect 1 2 types In that case will be displayed The Dry Wet settings for Effect 1 2 may au tomatically change when a panel voice is selected for R1 Digital Effects The Digital Equalizer PSR 730 Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room The sound is divided into several frequency bands then by raising or lowering the level for each band the correction is made Adjusting the sound you play according to the genre classical music more refined pops music more crisp and rock music more dynamic can also serve to draw out the special characteristics of the music and make your performance more enjoyable The PSR 730 possesses a high grade 5 band digital equalizer function With this function a final effect tone control can be added to the output of your instrument Example 04 Bright 12 12 7 2 0 2 7 LowGain LowMidGain MidGain HighMidGain HighGain Frequency Bands 5 bands 0 The range of each fre LowGain 80 Hz quency band can be changed by transmit LowMidGain 500 Hz ting the system exclu sive message from an MidGain 1 0 kHz external MIDI dev
223. mes increasingly eccentric Note that for some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by the voice This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the voice This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut off frequency set by the voice This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment Lower voices produce a softer sound For some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range 3 2 CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES STATUS 1011nnnn 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER CONTROL NUMBER c CONTROL NUMBER CONTROL VALUE Ovvvvvvv v DATA VALUE 3 2 1 ALL SOUND OFF Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 78H DATA VALUE 0 Switches off all sound from the channel Does not reset Note On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages 3 2 2 RESET ALL CONTROLLERS Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 79H DATA VALUE 0 Resets controllers as follows PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 Center AFTER TOUCH 0 min MODULATION 0 min EXPRESSION 127 max SUSTAIN 0 off SOSTENUTO 0 off SOFT PEDAL 0 off NRPN Sets number to null Internal data remains unchanged RPN Set
224. n page 44 DSP ene 45 VARIATION Button page 46 e MULTI EFFECT Button PSR 730 page 49 e HARMONY Button page 47 B DISPLAY amp RELATED CONTROLS DISPLAY ciiin page 8 MENU Buttons page 10 e SUB MENU Buttons page 10 VOICE B ltton ene page 10 STYLE Button s page 10 SONG Button itas page 10 REVOICE page 110 TRACK Buttons pages 19 20 28 86 111 REGISTRATION MEMORY SECTION BANK Buttons PSR 730 page 58 e MEMORY page 58 1 2 3 4 page 58 FREEZE Button page 60 B ONE TOUCH SETTING Button page 41 Panel Controls GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Button PSR 80 oerte uitis page 36 NUMBER Buttons page 10 10 Data page 10 KEYBOARD SECTION e DUAL VOICE Button page 19 SPLIT VOICE Button page 20 MULTI PAD SECTION STOP Button ueteres page 62 1 2 3 4 Buttons page 62 GD
225. n of the keyboard are The Synchro Stop function can not be released Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played turned on when the The BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the accompaneiment is stopped The Synchro Stop function is engaged by pressing the SYNC STOP button FULL KEYBOARD AUTO ACCOMPANI MENT fingering mode is selected The Syn chro Stop function will so that the SYNC STOP icon in the display appears Press the SYNC STOP be automatically button again so that the icon disappears to turn the Synchro Stop function off turned off if the FULL KEYBOARD fingering mode is selected while SYNC STOP START 1 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT A EN Touch EMORY M e SYNC STOP FINGERING mms eeo the Synchro Stop func tion is on BEAT td MULTI PAD 12 gt c 119 pci 616513 LZ mM 7augsus4 GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Individual track voic using the REVOICE Auto Accompaniment Using Virtual Arranger When the Virtual Arranger function is turned on while Auto Accompaniment is active simply pressing chords in the auto accompaniment section causes the Auto Accompaniment to automatically play slightly different chord variations which creates a livelier and more melodic accompaniment Turning the Virtual Arranger function off returns to normal Auto Accompaniment Press the STYLE button to select the STYLE menu The t
226. n re adjust the MASTER VOLUME If you play the PSR 730 630 control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins with the volume at its maxi mum level when the batteries are used the life of the bat MASTER oe Wi VOLUME teries will be shorter MIN MAX 3 Press the DEMO Button Press the DEMO button to start demo playback The PSR 730 630 SONG menu will automatically be selected and the number and name of the first demo 5 5 You can either have all the song will appear on the top line of the display The demo will begin playing demo songs played continu automatically The demo songs will play in sequence and the sequence will ously or have only one song 77 repeat until stopped The Demonstration 4 Skip to the Beginning Of a Different Demo Song While the demonstration is playing you can select any of the demo songs by using the and buttons Playback will skip to the beginning of the selected SOR 5 Stop When Done Press the DEMO button or the START STOP button to stop demo playback w 0 Stopping demo song playback then start START STOP ing it again by press ing the START Q STOP button will cause demo song playback to automati cally stop at the end of that song If the DEMO button is pressed in Style Mode page 11 the instrument will auto matically switch to Song Mode
227. n so that Disk Save YES is shown on the display Press the YES button and the song data will be replaced J Exit the Record Mode and try playing the song NOTE When in Quick Record Mode if both H1 and R2 voices are recorded on one track only the R1 voice can be edited When in Quick Record Mode you cannot edit the ACMP track If a track with no data is selected will appear at the top of the display and you won t be able to edit Each parameter can be recorded for one track one each for a track The parameter changes done in the middle of the song will be lost Style Recording The PSR 730 630 lets you record up to three original user styles which be used for auto accompaniment in the same way as the preset styles The user styles are recorded as style numbers 101 102 103 and 104 and each style can be recorded with the full complement of 8 tracks RHYTHM 1 RHYTHM 2 BASS CHORD 1 CHORD 2 PAD PHRASE 1 PHRASE 2 and 5 sections INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING FILL Material recorded on the STYLE tracks will be retained even after turning the power off See page 152 for the details The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off the AC adaptor is unplugged or the batteries fail during recording The REGISTRATION MEMORY cannot be recalled during style recording The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged
228. ndPno 229 214 0 1 0 GrndPnoK 230 215 0 18 0 MelloGrP 231 216 0 40 0 PianoStr 232 217 0 41 0 Dream 233 218 0 0 1 BritePno 234 219 0 1 1 BritPnoK 235 220 0 0 2 E Grand 236 221 0 1 2 ElGrPnoK 237 222 0 32 2 Det CP80 238 223 0 40 2 ElGrPnot 239 224 0 41 2 ElGrPno2 240 225 0 0 3 HnkyTonk 241 226 0 1 3 HnkyTnkK 242 227 0 0 4 E Piano1 243 228 0 1 4 1 244 229 0 18 4 MelloEP1 245 230 0 32 4 Chor EP1 246 231 0 40 4 HardEl P 247 232 0 45 4 248 233 0 64 4 60sEI P 249 234 0 0 5 E Piano2 250 235 0 1 5 2 251 236 0 32 5 Chor EP2 252 237 0 33 5 DX Hard 253 238 0 34 5 DXLegend 2541239 0 40 5 DX Phase 255 240 0 41 5 DX Analg 256 241 0 42 5 DXKotoEP 257 242 0 45 5 2 258 243 0 0 6 Harpsi 259 244 0 1 6 Harpsi K 260 245 0 25 6 Harpsi 2 261 246 0 35 6 Harpsi 3 262 247 0 0 7 Clavi 263 248 0 1 7 264 249 0 27 7 ClaviWah 265 250 0 64 7 PulseClv 266 251 0 65 7 PierceCl Chromatic Percussion 267 252 0 0 8 Celesta 268 253 0 0 9 269 254 0 0 10 MusicBox 270 255 0 64 10 Orgel 271 256 0 0 11 Vibes 272 257 0 1 11 VibesK 273 258 0 45 11 HardVibe 274 259 0 0 12 Marimba 275 260 0 1 12 MarimbaK 2
229. ne Touch Setting 40 User Style User Pad Registration Memory Data 65 Data that Can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR 730 630 nci este 65 Using Commercially Available Music Collections Sold Separately 66 The Sample Disk 66 Formal teet 67 nnna a a uai 68 Load giii enu te Pase eene 70 Disk Copy ae eterne ee dae 72 Song dritte qtti 73 Delete File imr terree 75 Song Playback 76 Song Playback Procedure 76 Song Volume Control esee 78 Play from a Specified Measure 78 Minus one Practice 79 Repeat Play irren 80 Song Repeat rc 81 Next icant 82 Song Recording 83 Quick Recording Procedure 84 Rehearsal eere te 86 Multi Recording Procedure 88 About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied 90 Punch In P nch Qut e trees 92 eee dp et ae Pod 93 Naming User 2 94 Clearing Song Data etc 94 M e Meme
230. nel the data from that track is transmitted via the lowest numbered channel To avoid MIDI loops which can cause op erational errors check the PSR 730 630 Lo cal Control setting page 127 and the MIDI THRU settings of any external MIDI devices MIDI transmit track settings will be re tained even after turn ing the power off See page 152 for the de tails The channels set for Rhythm1 Tr1 Phrase2 Tr8 will be used to transmit ac companiment data when the PSR 730 630 is in Style Mode and to transmit song track data when the PSR 730 630 is in Song Mode Receive Mode The ReceiveMode function specifies the receive mode for the channel selected viathe Receive Channel function above The receive mode settings are as follows Normal Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR 730 630 tone generator If all channels are set to Normal the PSR 730 630 functions as a 16 channel multi timbral tone generator Off Remote No MIDI data is received on channels set to Off Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as data generated by the PSR 730 630 s own keyboard In other words a remote keyboard could be used to control the PSR 730 630 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT functions etc Bass The note on off messages received at the channel s set to Bass are recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment section The bass notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on o
231. ng playback is started Reception Depending upon the condition Rhythm Song Playback or Song Rec will start 3 5 3 STOP STATUS 11111100 FCH Transmission Transmitted when instrument s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped Reception Depending upon the condition Rhythm Song Playback or Song Rec will stop 3 5 4 ACTIVE SENSING STATUS 11111110 FEH Transmission Transmitted approximately once every 200msec Reception Sensing is started once this Code is received If Status or Data is not received within 400ms the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared and all notes including those being sustained will be cut OFF Also all control values will be reset to their factory defaults 3 6 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3 6 1 YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT 3 6 1 1 SECTION CONTROL binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E Style 00000000 00 Osssssss SS Switch No 00H INTROA 01H 07H INTROB 08H MAINA 09H 0FH MAINB 10H FILL IN AA 11H 17H_ FILL IN BB 18H FILL IN AB 19H 1FH FILL IN BA 20H ENDING A 21H 27H ENDING B Oddddddd DD Switch On Off 00H Off 7FH On 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive When an ON code is received the appointed section will be changed MIDI Data Format 3 6 1 2 TEMPO CONTROL binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E Style 00000000 01 Ottttttt TT Tempo4 Ottttttt TT Tempo3 Ottttttt TT Tempo2 Otttttt
232. nges will appear in the display REGISTRATION MEMORY PoP JL n P m SY i E ai ie REPEAT REGISTRATION MEMORY The Accompanient Freeze Function When the FREEZE function is engaged the accompaniment parameters listed above will not be changed when a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled This allows you to recall different REGISTRATION MEMORY settings while using Auto Accompaniment without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment The FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the FREEZE button The FREEZE icon appears in the display when it is turned on JRY i Su ane e REGISTRATION MEMORY Registration data can not be recalled when the One Touch Set ting function is on When power is turned on or the bank is changed all of the numbers in the REG ISTRATION MEMORY section of the display will be blank NOTE FREEZE remains on even if a different reg istration bank is se lected The Freeze function will automatically be turned on when one of the following modes Song Record or Style Revoice is engaged The Multi Pads The PSR 730 630 MULTI PADS can be used to play a number of short pre recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances You can also record your own MULTI PAD phrases as described in MULTI PAD Recording on page 106 Some p
233. nnectors See page 121 Setting Up NOTE yy Be sure that you do not press the footswitch while turning the power on If you do the ON OFF sta tus of the footswitch will be reversed When the sustain or sostenuto pedal func tions are being used page 117 some voices may sound con tinuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the pedal is held CAUTION 5 Connecting PSR 730 630 to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices To pre vent damage to the speakers set the volume of the exter nal devices at the minimum setting be fore connecting them Failure to ob serve these cautions may result in elec tric shock or equip ment damage The Demonstration Once you ve set up your PSR 730 630 try listening to the pre programmed demonstration songs A total of 15 demo songs are provided 1 Switch on Turn the power ON by pressing the STAND BY ON switch CAUTION Even when the switch is in the STAND BY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the mini mum level When you are not using the PSR 730 630 for a long time make sure you unplug the AC power adoptor from the wall AC outlet and or remove the batteries from the instru ment STAND BY ON 2 Set an Initial Volume Level Turn the MASTER VOLUME control up clockwise about a quarter turn from its minimum position You ca
234. note After quantization 12 Eighth note triplet 3k 2 22 2 2 Sixteenth note 24 Sixteenth note triplet 32 Thirty second note Press the SUB MENU V button once so that Execute NO YES appears on the display Then press the YES button to execute the quantize function or the NO button to cancel the display will return to Quantize YES 4 After the quantize operation is completed Undo will appear on the top line of the display Undo lets you undo the effect of applying the quantize function Pressing the START STOP button will cause the quantized style to replay so that you can check it Press the YES button to undo the quantize operation Press the NO button and the undo won t be executed The display will return to Quantize YES Naming Styles You can give your own name 8 characters or less to user styles With the Style Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode engaged and the target style selected use the SUB MENU A and W buttons so that UserStyle appears on the display The current name for the style will be displayed at the upper right of the display The method of setting the characters is the same as for Registration Naming page 58 One measure of 8th notes before quantization After exiting from the Undo screen the undo function cannot be applied Style Recording Clearing U
235. nth add sharp eleventh M7 11 1 2 3 4 5 7 CM7 11 CM7 11 CHORD CANCEL 122347 function Flatted fifth b5 1 3 b5 C b5 C b5 gt Playing a single key Major seventh flatted fifth M755 1 3 b5 7 CM7b5 CM7 b5 or two same root keys Suspended fourth sus4 1 4 5 Csus4 Csus4 in the adjacent oc taves produces ac Augmented aug 1 3 5 Caug Caug companiment based Major seventh augmented M7aug 1 3 5 7 CM7aug CM7aug only on the root Minor m 1 b3 5 Cm Cm A perfect fifth 1 T 5 produces accompani Minor add ninth m 9 1 2 b3 5 Cm 9 Cm 9 ment based only on Minor sixth m6 1 b3 5 6 Cm6 Cm6 the root and fifth which can be used Minor seventh m7 1 b3 5 b7 Cm7 Cm7 with both major and Minor seventh ninth m7 9 1 2 b3 5 b7 Cm7 9 Cm7 9 minor chords Minor seventh eleventh m7 11 1 2 b3 4 5 b7 Cm7 11 7 11 chord fingerings Minor major seventh mM7 1 3 5 7 CmM7 CmM7 listed are all in root position but other in Minor major seventh ninth mM7 9 1 2 b3 5 7 7 9 7 9 versions be used Minor seventh flatted fifth m7b5 1 b3 b5 b7 5 Cm7 b5 with the following exceptions Minor major seventh flatted fifth mM755 1 b3 b5 7 CmM755 CmM7 b5 m7 m7b5 6 Diminished dim 1 b3 b5 Cdim Cdim sus4 aug dim7 Diminished seventh dim7 1 b3 b5 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 75 6 9 7 11 14245 Seventh 7 1 3 5 b70r C7 C7 1 3 5 57 Inversion of the 7sus4
236. o both the Accompaniment track and keyboard R1 track and the remaining six measures from fifth through the end with the Room 1 applied to both tracks The effect types set for the Accompani ment track are replaced with the latest settings Only the Depth for each track remains the same Song Recording DSP type effects can be set and recorded for R1 R2 L part s when used as System effect and for R1part when used as Insertion effect They can t be recorded for the track used as the Accompaniment and or Harmony part During playback only the latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a song the latest setting priority EX 1 Turn on the panel DSP button and start recording on the track 1 with the Distortion DSP type No 42 Dist Hard selected for ten measures from the beginning 2 Turn off the panel DSP button and start recording on the track 2 without any effect from the beginning Then turn on the panel DSP button again at the fifth measure and continue recording to the end with the Rotary Speaker DSP type No 28 Rotary SP 1 selected When you play back the song recorded with the above condition the first four measures will be played back with the Distortion applied only to track 1 and the remaining six measures from the fifth through the end with the Rotary Speaker applied only to track 2 The DSP type set for track 1 is replaced by the one set for the track 2 PSR 730 M
237. o select the Song Edit YES function 2 When the YES button is pressed the track bar will flash under the lowest numbered track that has data in it This shows that this is the track that is selected for editing On the top line of the display the current voice parameter and value for the track will be displayed While the track is being cleared Now Deleting is dis played never eject the floppy disk or turn off power to the PSR 730 630 Demo Songs cannot be cleared Song Recording 3 Press the TRACK button to select the track you will edit The track bar for the selected track will light p gt p P gt b gt gt 12813 331 381 259 434 468 H42 M11 P 250 213 013 213 213 213 m L 2 R1 ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK SONG TRACK L R2 R1 4 Use the SUB MENU W button so that the voice parameter you wish to change appears on the display The parameter and value will appear at the top of the display In the same way as for the revoice function page 111 use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to change the setting See page 110 for information about each value B Repeat steps 3 4 as needed 6 When editing is finished press the SUB MENU A butto
238. o the disk drive will be displayed at the top of the display and disk operations won t be possible NOTE When the floppy disk s write protect tab is set to ON see page 64 or the disk is a purposely copy protected disk the display shows Disk Write Protected in dicating that the Song Copy function is not possible While the song is copying Now Copy ing is displayed never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off Disk Operations Delete File You can delete saved data User Songs User Styles User Pads or Registration Memory from the floppy disk in file units 1 Insert the Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive Insert the disk with the files you want to delete into the disk drive 2 Select a Delete File Function Use the MENU A and W buttons to select the Disk function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to DISK to the left of the display Use the SUB MENU A and F buttons so that Delete File YES appears on the display 3 Select the File to Be Deleted Prem box Torn o d iom o4 LEE E RP ecc om PIE Edidi d Lom PPOPRPR Es L ES OEPEPEPI P5 Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the file you wish to delete Execute the Delete Operation Press the SUB MENU button so that Execute NO YES appears on the display Press
239. ode is selected while the Har mony effect is on If a drum kit voice is se lected for R1 when Har mony is turned on Har mony will be automatically be turned off Shortcut You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL EFFECT HARMONY TYPE function by pressing and holding the HARMONY button for a few seconds NOTE When the Voice Set func tion is ON see page 116 the HARMONY type may change according to the selected H1 panel voice Digital Effects Adjusting the Harmony Volume The volume of the harmony sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be adjusted for Harmony types 1 through 16 as follows Use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT then use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select Harm Vol The current harmony volume setting will appear to the right of Harm Vol on the display Use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to adjust the harmony volume as required The range is from 0 to 127 3 Multi Effect PSR 730 Multi Effect allows you to apply three types of effects reverb chorus and DSP more powerfully and effectively How Multi Effect Works When the Voice Set function is ON see page 116 the Har mony Volume may change according to the selected R1 panel voice Changing the volume of the harmony sound may not produce au
240. of the display and the PSR 730 630 will switch to Song Mode lighting the icon on the display pip 1 1156 REGISTRATION I c Wer St sons When playing back a song recorded on a floppy disk insert the disk into the disk drive a 8 E ES gt ACMP SO VOLUMI REPEAT REGISTRATION N Inserting the disk will cause the PSR 730 630 to automatically change to the SONG menu and the name and number of the currently selected song will appear on the left of the top line of the display The PSR 730 630 will switch to Song Mode lighting the icon on the display and the floppy disk icon will be shown 2 Enter the Song Number Use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to select the song to be played back The SONG button can also be pushed to increment the song number and holding it down will cause the number to increment continuously md pis rs LILIT LJL oog TEMPO REPEAT d ACMP SONG TRANSPOSE VOLUME REGISTRATION NOTE Entering the Song Mode automatically selects the following settings Auto Accom paniment Off Syn chro Start Off Syn chro Stop Off and Registration Memory Freeze On These settings cannot be al tered in Song Mode Inserting the disk con taining no song data won t automatically select the SONG
241. og Brs 139 0 113 62 Jump Brass 140 0 114 62 TechnoBrass Reed 141 0 112 64 Soprano Sax 142 0 112 65 Alto Sax 143 0 113 65 BreathyAlto 144 0 112 66 Tenor Sax 145 0 114 66 BreathTenor 146 0 112 67 BaritoneSax 147 0 116 66 Sax Section 148 0 112 71 Clarinet 149 0 113 71 MelClarinet 150 0 113 66 WoodwindEns 151 0 115 66 Brass Combo 152 0 112 68 Oboe 153 0 112 69 EnglishHorn 154 0 112 70 Bassoon 155 0 112 109 Bagpipe Pipe 156 0 112 73 Flute 157 0 112 75 Pan Flute 158 0 112 72 Piccolo 159 0 113 73 EthnicFlute 160 0 112 77 Shakuhachi 161 0 112 78 Whistle 162 0 112 74 Recorder 163 0 112 79 Ocarina Synth Lead 164 0 112 80 Square Lead 165 0 112 81 Saw Lead 166 0 113 81 Big Lead 167 0 112 98 Stardust 168 0 114 81 Blaster 169 0 115 81 Analogon 170 0 113 80 Vintage Ld 171 0 113 98 Sun Bell 172 0 112 83 Aero Lead 173 0 116 81 Fire Wire 174 0 114 80 Mini Lead 175 0 115 80 Vinylead 176 0 117 81 Warp PSR 730 630 XG Voice List Voice List PSR 730 PSR 630 Bank Select MIDI Voice Voice Voice Number Number MSB LSB Number Piano 228 213 0 0 0 Gra
242. oice number is also shown at the upper right of the display panel The R1 Right hand 1 the R2 Right hand 2 and the L Ps Left hand voices are shown Playing with a Single Voice R1 Voice Playing with Two Voices Dual Voice Mode page 19 E IA ERES R1 Voice R2 Voice Playing Separate Voices with the Right and Left Hands Split Voice Mode page 20 rua minim ism R1 Voice R2 Voice tip VOICE VOICE 1 SPLIT VOICE VOICE VOICE L R2 R1 SPLIT DUAL L Voice 4 Split Voice Mode Dual Voice Mode Playing the PSR 730 630 Selecting amp Playing R1 Voices 1 Select the VOICE Menu Press the VOICE button so that the triangular indicator appears in the display next to VOICE to the right of the display The number and name of the currently selected voice appears on the top right of the display panel when the VOICE menu is selected VOICE 2 Select a Panel Voice The PSR 730 630 voices can be selected by using the and buttons the number buttons the data dial or the VOICE button The and Buttons When the VOICE menu is selected these buttons step up or down through the PSR 730 630 s voices Press either button briefly to
243. on See page 101 for more details on recording around a CM7 chord mn START STOP e A N 36 MEASURE BEAT MULTI PAD Stop Recording Stop recording by pressing the START STOP button When recording is stopped the record ready mode will be engaged START STOP 9 Record Additional Pads as Required By repeating steps 3 through 7 above you can select and record additional pads as required 9 Exit From the Record Mode When you re finished recording pads press the RECORD button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the record mode The recorded user pad can now be played back in the same way as the preset pads page 61 X gt NOTE Before actually starting to record you can try playing the PSR 730 630 the way it is set up by using the Rehearsal Mode press the SYNC START button to temporarily disengage the record ready mode rehearse as necessary then press the SYNC START button again to return to the record ready mode Whenever you record a MULTI PAD any previously recorded material in the same MULTI PAD will be erased If the memory becomes full while recording Full will ap pear on the display and re cording will stop the record ready mode will be engaged Multi Pad Recording Naming Pads You can give your own name 8 characters or less to user pad sets With the Pad Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode enga
244. ong will play af ter the first song re gardless of whether the play mode is set for Single or All While the selected next song is playing the song to play after it finishes can be se lected in the same way using the Next Song function If the first song and the next song are the same the Next Song feature won t work Doing any of the fol lowing operations will automatically cause the song repeat func tion to turn off Changing the song number Turning on the Song Repeat function page 81 Setting the Play Mode to All page 77 Song Recording You can record your own music performance on a floppy disk as a user song User Songs are recorded on floppy disks They can t be recorded unless a floppy disk is in serted into the disk drive The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged Quick Recording You can easily record four tracks from the PSR 730 630 keyboard together with on track of Auto Accompaniment SS dou 133 54004 8 109 z MELODY MELODY MELODY it VOICE VOICE lt gt R2 R1 B RSS Ww i Multi Recording In Multi Recording the different parts of the some are divided among tracks 1 16 with keyboard playing on tracks 1 5 harmony notes on tracks 6 8 and auto accompaniment RHYTHM1 PHRASE2 on tracks 9 16 This lets you fine tune the recording settings for each
245. osphere 147 0 120 61 BrightBrass 210 0 113 93 Phase IV 148 0 121 61 Big Brass 211 0 113 88 Symbiont 149 0 113 57 Trb Section 212 0 114 94 Solaris 150 0 112 62 Synth Brass 213 0 116 88 Time Travel 151 0 112 63 Analog Brs 214 0 117 88 Millenium 152 0 113 62 Jump Brass 215 0 113 95 Transform 153 0 114 62 TechnoBrass Drum Kits Reed 216 127 0 0 Std Kit1 154 0 112 64 Soprano Sax 217 127 0 1 Std Kit2 155 0 112 65 Alto Sax 218 127 0 8 Room Kit 156 0 113 65 BreathyAlto 219 127 0 16 Rock Kit 157 0 112 66 Tenor Sax 220 127 0 24 Electro Kit 158 0 114 66 BreathTenor 221 127 0 25 Analog Kit 159 0 112 67 BaritoneSax 222 127 0 27 Dance Kit 160 0 116 66 Sax Section 223 127 0 32 Jazz Kit 161 0 112 71 Clarinet 224 127 0 40 Brush Kit 162 0 113 71 MelClarinet 225 127 0 48 Classic Kit 163 0 113 66 WoodwindEns 226 126 0 0 SFX Kit1 164 0 115 66 Brass Combo 227 126 0 1 SFX Kit2 PSR 630 Panel Voice List Voice List MIDI 5 Bank Select MIDI voice ank Select Program Voice Name voice Program Voice Name Number MSB Lsg Change Number MSB 15 Change Number Number Piano 59 0 113 24 Spanish Gtr 1 0 112 0 Grand Piano 60 0 112 25 Folk Guitar 2 0 112 1 BrightPiano 61 0 113 25 12StrGuitar 3 0 112 3 Honky Tonk 62 0 112 26 Jazz
246. p tors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the PSR 730 630 Unplug the AC Power Adap tor when not using the PSR 730 630 or during electrical storms CAUTION 5 When the batteries run down replace them with a complete set of six new batteries NEVER mix old and new batteries Do not use different kinds of batteries e g alkaline and manganese at the same time If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time remove the batteries from it in order to prevent pos sible fluid leakage from the battery Plugging or unplugging the AC power adaptor while the batteries are in stalled will reset the PSR 730 630 to the defaults other data in internal memory including user styles user pads Taking the above precautions into consideration always use an AC power adaptor when using the PSR 630 730 for an impor tant performance or when creating important data When using batteries and the Lo Battery warning initially appears on the display the volume will drop a little but you will be able to use the instrument for a while longer When the Lo warning begins to appear every few seconds re place the batteries as soon as possible PHONES Jack SUSTAIN Pedal Jack SUSTAIN FOOT VOL A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late night playing The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut
247. pe for Effect 1 2 50 AUX OUT R and L L R Jacks 13 Adjust the Dry Wet Settings for Effect 1 2 50 MIDI IN OUT and TO HOST Connectors 13 The Digital Equalizer 730 51 Using the Digital Equalizer PSR 730 51 The Demonstration 14 Selecting a Digital EQ Type 52 Setting the Gain User Setting 53 Playing the PSR 730 630 16 The Pitch Bend Wheel 54 A Word About the R1 R2 and L Voices 16 Setting the Pitch Bend Range 54 Selecting amp Playing R1 Voices 17 Keyboard Percussion eee 19 The Dual Voice 19 The Modulation Wheel PSR 730 55 The Split Voice 20 Changing the Modulation Wheel Function 55 Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point 21 Transpose 56 Auto Accompaniment 22 Setting Transposition 56 What is Auto Accompaniment 22 Using Auto Accompaniment 22 Charging TEMPO 26 Registration Memo
248. pecified voice or track and thus the amount of DSP effect applied to that voice or track 2 Revoicing the R1 R2 and L Voices 1 Select the VOICE REVOICE Mode While the VOICE menu is selected press the REVOICE button actually the order here is not important you can also press the VOICE button after pressing the REVOICE button The REVOICE button indicator will light and the R1 voice track will be bracketed by two horizontal bars i e the R1 voice is initially selected for revoicing 71171 LILI I VOICE Hoe STYLE Hi STYLE ck 109 i REVOICE oe Voce vade a soNG SONG NOTE You cannot enter Revoice Mode when one of the Record Modes is engaged With Style Revoice the octave and the DSP depth cannot be changed When using Style Revoice for the track only drum kit voices see page 19 can be se lected When using Style Revoice for the RHYTHM track any of the voices can be selected but no chord changes will occur when using Auto Ac companiment NOTE The VOICE REVOICE mode will automati cally be selected if the REVOICE button is pressed while any menu other than STYLE or SONG is selected The VOICE REVOICE mode cannot be se lected while one of the record modes is engaged 2 If Necessary Select a Voice to Revoice Use the three rig
249. played by the PSR 730 630 Auto Accompani ment system when the accompaniment is stopped except when the FULL KEY BOARD mode is engaged In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected automatically a Groove and Dynamics PSR 730 The PSR 730 Groove amp Dynamics function lets you temporarily change the timing velocity and gate time of notes during playback of any of the preset accompaniment styles style numbers 1 100 Groove Lets you play the music with some swing or put a little groove in the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing clock of the accompaniment Dynamics Changes the impression of the accompaniment by varying the velocity of the notes in relation to the timing The Groove amp Dynamics function is composed of the four items below When you choose an accompaniment style the most appropriate template or value for each item will be automatically set Beat Groove Template Automatically selected from 49 types Measure Groove Template Automatically selected from 25 types Dynamics Template Automatically selected from 17 types e Dynamics Rate Automatically set within a range of 0 100926 e Expand Rate Automatically set within a range of 0 400926 e Boost Rate Automatically set within a range of 0 400945 If you want to play minor seventh or minor seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode al ways press the closest whi
250. please check the following points PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION The speakers produce a pop sound whenever the power is turned ON or OFF This is normal and is no cause for alarm The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted The registration memory doesn t work properly Recorded song data will not play back properly The display goes bland and all panel controls are reset The batteries probably needto be replaced Either replace all six batteries or use an AC power adaptor No sound when the keyboard is played The R1 R2 L voice volume settings could be set too low Make sure the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels pages 14 111 The Local Control function could be turned off Make sure Local Control is turned on page 127 Not all simultaneously played notes sound Auto Accompaniment seems to skip when the keyboard is played You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR 730 630 The PSR 730 can play up to 64 notes 32 notes for PSR 630 at the same time including split dual auto accompaniment song and multi pad notes Notes exceeding this limit will not sound Auto Accompaniment doesn t sound when started The MIDI Clock mode may be set to on Make sure it is turned off page 128 Auto accompaniment won t function properly No lower key board sound Make sure that all accompaniment tracks are turned on and that the th
251. priate sections of this manual Others will be introduced for the first time in this section Refer to the chart below for the page numbers on which each function is described The chart also lists the full name of each function the abbreviated name which appears on the display and the available settings or range of settings Ranges are indicated by two or more values separated by ellipsis Function Settings Page Touch Sensitivity 0 127 115 Pitch Bend Range 01 12 54 Master Tuning 50 50 115 Scale Tuning Note 115 Scale Tuning 64 63 115 Song Transpose 12 12 116 Metronome Off On 116 Split Voice Split Point 0 127 21 Accompaniment Split Point 0 127 30 Fingering Mode Multi Single 31 Fingered1 Fingered2 Full Key Multi Voice Set Off On 116 Pedal1 Sustain 117 Groove amp Dyn Pedal2 Expression 117 Groove amp Dyn Pedal1 Polarity Normal Revers 118 Pedal2 Polarity Normal Revers 118 Modulation Wheel Modulation 55 Brightness Resonance To access an OVERALL function first use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to OVERALL MENU v X Then use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the desired function from within the OVERALL menu When a function is selected the current setting will appearto the right ofthe function name on the top line ofthe display Once
252. quencer software is needed MIDI Functions Computer sequencer software MIDI Cc 1 MIDI OUT MIDI IN PSR 730 630 MAU MIDI IN MIDI OUT When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer connect the RS 422 terminal of the computer modem or printer terminal to the MIDI interface then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR 730 630 as show in the diagram below Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR 730 630 to MIDI Computer sequencer software MIDI 1 MIDI interface MIDI IN E PSR 730 630 ML RS 422 When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the MIDI position input and output in the TO HOST Switch is ignored When using a Macintosh series computer set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using For details carefully read the owner s manual for the software you are using Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc IBM PC AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp Other company names and product names etc in this manual are registered trademarks o
253. r off and replace the batteries Replace the batteries as follows Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument s bottom panel Insert the six new batteries being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment Replace the compartment cover making sure that it locks firmly in place A Important Notes on Battery Use Since the PSR 730 and PSR 630 consume a considerable amount of power Yamaha recommends the use of an AC power adaptor rather than batteries The batteries should be consid ered an auxiliary power source for data backup q q q registration memory etc The floppy disk drive in particular uses a large amount of power so it is important to always use an AC power adaptor when performing disk intensive operations such as song re cording playback or data load save If you attempt to use battery power for these operations and the batteries do fail you will lose not only the data you re recording or saving but also gt Battery Never interrupt the power supply e g remove the batteries or unplug the AC adaptor during any PSR 730 630 record op eration Doing so can re sult in a loss of data Use ONLY a Yamaha PA 6 Power Adaptor or other adaptor specifically recom mended by Yamaha to power your instrument from the AC mains The use of other ada
254. r trademarks of those companies MIDI Functions ll Connect using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer RS 232C terminal or RS 422 terminal to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR 730 630 For the connection cable use the cable below sold separately that matches the personal computer type Macintosh Series Connectthe RS 422terminal modem or printerterminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR 730 630 using a serial cable system peripheral cable 8 bit Set the PSR 730 630 HOST SELECT switch in the MAC position SSS HT Mac mini DIN 8 pin mini DIN 8 pin ey I zm Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz For details carefully read the owner s manual for the software you are using IBM PC AT Series Connect the RS 232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR 730 630 using a serial cable D SUB 9P gt MINI DIN 8P cross cable Set the PSR 730 630 HOST SELECT switch in the PC 2 position pce mini DIN 8 pin 11 e 5 D SUB 9 When using a D SUB 25 gt DIN 8P cross cable connect using a D SUB plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable E mini DIN 8 pin D SUB 25 pin D SUB 9 pin For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using see the owner s manuals for each of them NOTE D If you
255. r will be reset to default values According to the Drum Setup Reset message individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values lt Table 1 9 gt Effect Type List XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT Same as LSB 0 XG OPTION EFFECT Tf the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0 Panel Effects are based on the Number Effect Name Using an external sequencer capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes allows you to select the reverb chorus and DSP effect types which are not accessible from the PSR 730 630 panel operation When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer XG Rev XG Cho or XG Eff will be shown on the display REVERB TYPE TYPELSB MSB 00 000 NO EFFECT 001 1 HALL1 2 HALL2 4JHALL4 B HALLS 002 6 1 ROOM2 ROOM ROOM 003 10 STAGE1 1115 2 12 STAGE3 004 13 PLATE PLATE 005 015 NO EFFECT 016 14 WHITE ROOM 017 15 TUNNEL 018 CANYON 019 16 BASEMENT 020 127 EFFECT CHORUS TYPE TYPE LSB MSB 00 000 NO EFFECT 001 064 NO EFFECT 065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 066 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE4 CELESTE CELESTE 067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER FLANGER 068 SYMPHONIC 069 071
256. racks where data is already recorded will light If the RECORD button is pressed the lowest numbered user song which does not con tain any recorded data will au tomatically be selected The following panel setting changes will occur when the record ready mode is engaged The measure number will be re set to 1 If the Metronome function is on page 116 the metronome will sound at the current tempo The Registration Memory Freeze function will be turned on it cannot be turned off while the record mode is engaged The SYNCHRO STOP function wil be turned off a Song Recording 5i Ca a VOICE VOICE Ri SONG TRACK L R2 R1 9 10 11 12 13 Recording the ACMP track If you press the TRACK button below the ACMP track the ACMP track bar will light and the ACMP track will be selected as the recording track If you do this when AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will automatically be turned on Pe 9 o 2 BS 3ASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY RASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY lt s m lt s m lt 5 m z N 2 gt SONG TRACK L R2 R1 r c 10 11 12 15 16 b Record Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the START STOP button and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode The MEASURE p
257. rameter2 Insertion Parameter3 Insertion Parameter4 Insertion Parameter5 Insertion Parameter6 Prameter Name Refer to the Ef Type List 49 ZDISTORTION 00 basic type Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List Refer to the Ef Parameter List MIDI Data Format Default Value H Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type Depend on Vari Type 60 40 00 00 00 7F 40 40 40 Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Depend on Variation Type Default Value H 0 40 0C 07 00 40 1C 07 40 22 07 40 2E 07 40 3C 07 00 Description Default Value H 00 MIDI Data Format Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default H H H Value H 08 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter7 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 09 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter8 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter9 Refer to the Ef Parameter List OB 1 00 7F Insertion Parameter10 Refer to the Ef Parameter List 0C 1 00 7F Insertion Part 1 16 7 OD 00 7F MW INS CTRL DPT OE 1 00 7F BEND INS CTRL DPT OF 1 00 7 CAT INS CTRL DP
258. rding Stop recording by pressing the START STOP button The PSR 730 630 will return to Record Ready Mode When recording is stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to 1 START STOP 10 Record Additional Sections amp Tracks as Required By repeating steps 5 through 9 above you can select and record additional sections and tracks as required I1 Exit From the Record Mode When you re finished recording a style press the RECORD button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the record mode The recorded user style can now be used in the same way as the preset styles page 22 RECORD X NOTE During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn play back of previously re corded tracks on or off as required For recording the RHYTHM 1 2 tracks the instrument sym bols printed on the front edge of the panel show you the instrument assign ments to each key See Keyboard Per cussion on page 140 for playing each drum percussion sound You can also press the SYNC START button to stop record ing and return to the Record Ready Mode NOTE The voice data in spe cific user style tracks can be revoiced in the same way as the preset styles as de scribed on page 112 This however does not actually rewrite the user style data In order to actually change the user style data first use the revoice function then immediately engage and disen
259. riangular indicator will appear next to STYLE to the right of the display and the PSR 730 630 will enter Style Mode the icon will light Mes When Style Mode is selected with the Style Menu the icon is lit the on off setting of the Virtual Arranger can be changed with the Sub Menu Select the V Arranger sub menu using the SUB MENU A keys The current on off status will be shown at the top right of the display SUB MENU The volume of the accompaniment in relation to the keyboard can be adjusted for the best overall balance by using the ACMP SONG VOLUME and A buttons When either button is pressed the current accompaniment volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds The accompaniment volume range is from 0 no sound to 127 maximum volume The default setting is 100 Press the ACMP SONG VOLUME W button to decrease the volume or the A button to increase the volume Press the button briefly to single step or hold to continuously decrement or increment ACMP SONG 4 VOLUME i 9104 nn Dui ZR REPEAT o ES 2 NOTE Simultaneously press ing the SYNC STOP and SYNC START buttons causes the Virtual Arranger to switch between off and on The current on off status will be shown at the top right of the display The on off display will re turn to its original con dition aft
260. rm Str 479 464 0 64 66 TnrSax2 541 526 0 67 90 SquarPad 419 404 0 41 49 Kingdom 480 465 0 0 67 Bari Sax 542 527 0 0 91 ChoirPad 420 405 0 64 49 70s Str 481 466 0 0 68 Oboe 543 528 0 64 91 Heaven2 421 406 0 65 49 Str Ens3 482 467 0 0 69 Eng Horn 544 529 0 66 91 422 407 0 0 50 Syn Str1 483 468 0 0 70 Bassoon 545 530 0 67 91 CC Pad 423 408 0 27 50 ResoStr 484 469 0 O 71 Clarinet 546 531 0 0 92 BowedPad 424 409 0 64 50 SynStr4 547 532 0 64 92 Glacier 425 410 0 65 50 SS Str 485 470 0 Piccolo 548 533 0 65 92 GlassPad 426 411 0 0 51 Syn Str2 486 471 0 Flute 549 534 0 0 9 MetalPad 427 412 0 0 52 ChoirAah 487 472 0 Recorder 550 535 0 64 93 Tine Pad 428 413 0 3 52 S Choir 488 473 0 PanFlute 551 536 0 65 93 Pan Pad 429 414 0 16 52 Ch Aahs2 489 474 0 Bottle 552 537 0 0 94 Halo Pad 430 415 0 32 52 MelChoir 490 475 0 Shakhchi 553 538 0 0 95 SweepPad 431 416 0 40 52 ChoirStr 491 476 0 Whistle 554 539 0 20 95 Shwimmer 432 417 0 0 53 VoiceOoh 492 477 0 Ocarina 555 540 0 27 95 Converge 433 418 0 0 54 SynVoice ynth Lead 556 541 0 64 95 PolarPad 434 419 0 40 54 SynVox2 493 478 0 Squarel d 557 542 0 66 95 Celstial 435 420 0 41 54 Choral 494 479
261. ry 57 Beat Indicator eet 26 Registering the Panel Settings 57 Accompaniment Sections eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 27 Naming the Registration Banks 58 Accompaniment Track Muting 28 Recall the Registered Panel Settings 60 The Synchro Stop Function sssssssss 28 The Accompanient Freeze Function 60 Using Virtual Arranger Accompaniment Volume Control The Multi Pads 61 Changing the Accompaniment Split Point Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT Selecting a MULTI PAD 61 and SPLIT VOICE Split Points 31 Playing the MULTI PADS 62 The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes 31 Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On Off 63 The Stop Accompaniment Function 35 Groove and Dynamics PSR 730 35 Applying Groove amp 36 Disk Operations 64 Arranging the Groove amp Dynamics Effect Floppy Disk Handling Precautions 64 User e cicineenetnpicetputtteitos tudin 36 User Song Data ierit erri tbe 65 O
262. s manual contains important safety and operating instructions It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name trademark and or ID numbers have been altered defaced exchanged removed or to failures and or damages that may occur as a result of 1 Neglect abuse abnormal strain modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity 2 Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product an authorized service center or an authorized service representative of Yamaha 3 This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U S A the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U S A or in any other country Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below Model Serial Sales Slip Purchased from Date Retailer YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS DO NOT MAIL For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten
263. s number to null Internal data remains unchanged PORTAMENT CONTROL Resets portamento source note number PORTAMENTO 0 off 3 2 3 ALL NOTES OFF Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 7BH DATA VALUE 0 Switches off all of the channel s on notes However any notes being held by SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO goes off 3 2 4 OMNI OFF Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 7CH DATA VALUE 0 Same processing as for All Notes Off 3 2 5 OMNI ON Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 7DH DATA VALUE 0 Same processing as for All Notes Off Omni On is not executed 3 2 6 MONO Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 7EH DATA VALUE 0 Same processing as for All Notes Off If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0 16 the corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 m 1 3 2 7 POLY Recive only CONTROL NUMBER 7FH DATA VALUE 0 Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 3 3 3 REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER RPN STATUS 1011nnnn BnH n 0 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER RPN LSB 01100100 64H RPN LSB NUMBER Oppppppp p RPN LSB refer to the list below RPN MSB 01100101 65H RPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110 06H DATA VALUE mmmmmmm m Data Value DATA ENTRY LSB 00100110 26H DATA VALUE q RPN MSBrrefer to the list below 1 Data Value First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB LSB then sets the parameter value for
264. s or data dial or number buttons where applicable to set the function as required SUB MENU MENU DISK Pu MULTI PAD y RET EN REGIST MEMORY MENU MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL y Y Transmit Channel amp Transmit Track The PSR 730 630 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels The Transmit Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR 730 630 data is transmitted via which MIDI channels Transmit Channel The TransmitCh function selects a MIDI channel to which a PSR 730 630 track can be assigned via the Transmit Track function below First select a transmit channel then the transmit track for that channel Different tracks can be assigned to each of the 16 MIDI channels Any of the standard MIDI channels 1 through 16 can be specified MIDI Functions MIDI Functions Transmit Track The Transmit Tr function selects the track to be transmitted via the transmit channel specified by the Transmit Channel function above The available settings are as follows Right1 Right hand keyboard playing R1 voice Right2 Right hand keyboard playing R2 voice Left Left hand keyboard playing L voice Harmony1 Harmony notes 1 Harmony2 Harmony notes 2 Harmony3 Harmony notes 3 Rhythm2 Tr2 Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM track Track 2 Rhythm1 Tr1 Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM track Track 1 Bass Tr3 Auto A
265. same way press and hold a panel button for a few seconds to go to the related function For example if you press and hold the REVERB button for a few seconds you will go directly to the REVERB type selection function The shorcuts will also be described where appropriate throughout this manual Setting Up This section contains information about setting up your PSR 730 630 and preparing to play Be sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR 730 630 Power Supply Although the PSR 730 630 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries Yamaha recommends use ofthe more environmentally safe AC adaptor Follow the instructions below according to the power source you intend to use Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor Plug an optional Yamaha PA 6 Power Adaptor into a wall AC outlet Then plug the DC output cable from the PA 6 into the DC IN 10 12V jack on the rear panel of the PSR 730 630 The internal batteries are automatically disconnected when an AC Power Adaptor is used DC IN 10 12V gt When turning the power OFF simply reverse the procedure Using Batteries For battery operation the PSR 730 630 requires six 1 5 V SUM 1 D size R 20 or equivalent batteries When the batteries need to be replaced Lo Battery may appear on top of the display the volume may be reduced the sound may be distorted and other problems may occur When this happens turn the powe
266. ser Style Data This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR 730 630 User Style tracks Clearing an Entire Style While the STYLE record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select the Clear YES function then press the YES button Are You Sure NO YES will appear on the display Press the YES button a second time to actually clear the currentl y selected user style the preset styles cannot be cleared Press NO if you want to abort the clear operation Clearing Selected Style Tracks While the STYLE record ready or rehearsal mode is engaged and a section is selected use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the Track Clear function The style track icons corresponding to tracks which contain data will flash Use the TRACK buttons to select track s you want to clear the selected tracks will be bracketed by two horizontal bars Tu Tu Mo co Tu uo na lt lt lt uu ca PHRASE PHRASE MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE L 2 5 1 B xx HS RS 5 20 E 5 3 o o T 5 2 o 41 4 mopa BASS CHORD CHORD PAD PHRASE PHRASE MELODY L RD d Y Be ox ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK 8 Once the desired tracks have been selected Are You Sure NO YES will appear on the display Press the YES button to
267. sonal Computer TO HOST Terminal HOST SELECT Switch 122 Connect using the PSR 730 630 MIDI terminals 122 Connect using the TO HOST terminal 124 The PSR 730 630 MIDI Functions 125 Transmit Channel amp Transmit Track 125 Receive Channel amp Receive Mode 126 Local Control eri 127 i q e rE 128 Initial Data 128 MIDI Template corriente 129 l Appendix 130 PSR 730 630 Display MENU SUB MENU Structure 130 Voice edente eet 133 Maximum Polyphony eee 133 Drum Kit List 5 eere 140 Style LST EG e rien 142 About Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP 143 When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect 143 When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect 144 Harmony Type List 147 Refining User Styles with Style File Format 148 Style File Auto Accompaniment Format 148 About the Source Chord 150 Troubleshooting 2 1 151 Data Backup amp Initialization 152 Data Backup e Euch scene eruere e 152 Data 152 MIDI Dat
268. sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off he electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it A CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televi radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord Sions radios or speakers since this might cause interference which can place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could affect proper operation of the other products walk on trip over or roll anything over it Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acci When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet al dentally fall over ways hold the plug itself and not the cord Before moving the instrument remove all connected adaptor and other Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple cables connector Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause When cleaning the instrument us ft dry cloth Do not use paint overheating in the
269. speaker simulation 33 34 Tremolo 1 2 Insertion Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation 35 Guitar Tremolo Insertion Simulated electric guitar tremolo 36 Auto Pan Insertion Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position left right front back 37 Auto Wah Insertion Repeating filter sweep wah effect 38 Delay L C R System Three independent delays for the left right and center stereo positions 39 Delay L R System Initial delay for each stereo channel and two separate feedback delays 40 Echo System Stereo delay with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel 41 Cross Delay System Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats bouncing between the left and right channels 42 Distortion Hard Insertion Hard edge distortion 43 Distortion Soft Insertion This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard 44 EQ Disco Insertion Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies 45 EQ Telephone Insertion Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate the sounds through telephone 46 OFF No effect About Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP The Multi Effect List PSR 730 No Effect Type Features 01 04 Hall1 4 Concert hall reverb 05 08 Room1 4 Small room reverb 09 10 Stage1 2 Reverb for solo instruments 11 12 Plate1 2 Simulated steel plate reverb 13 17 Chor
270. step to the next voice in the corresponding direction or hold the button to scroll rapidly through the voices in the corresponding direction The Number Buttons The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number of other voices To select voice number 109 for example press the 1 0 and 9 number buttons in sequence Ici 03 Xu T The above illustration shows the display of the PSR 730 _ Playing the PSR 730 630 One or two digit voice numbers can be entered without leading zeros To select voice number 23 for example simply press the 2 button and then the 3 button The bars below the voice number on the display will flash for a few seconds and then disappear when the selected voice number has been recognized by the PSR 730 630 ORS anna 122 4 44 7 The above illustration shows the display of EB the PSR 730 One or two digit voice numbers can also be entered with leading zeroes e g 23 can be entered as 023 by pressing the 0 2 and 3 buttons In this case the specified voice number will be immediately recognized by the PSR 730 630 The Data Dial Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment the voice number or counter clockwise to decrement the voice number Q The VOICE Button Pressing the VOICE button increments the
271. t The Note Transposition Rule and Note Transpo sition Table that are set for each track are used for this After the transposition is made the transposed notes are checked to see if they can be correctly played within the range of the instrument then the accompaniment is played Thefollowing SFF settings can be executed only after recording each track still in the Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode The SFF settings can be done only when the Record Ready Mode or Rehearsal Mode is engaged The SFF settings cannot be made for the RHYTHM 1 2 tracks Source Pattern Settings NTR Note Transposition Rule Setting El Source Chord Root setting Source Chord Type setting Set the key in which the source pattern will be played when the user style is created The default setting is CM7 The source chord root is C and the source chord type is M7 After finishing recording with the recorded track selected select the S ChordRoot sub menu and use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the chord root obi After setting the source chord root select the S Chord Type sub menu and use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the chord type See page 150 for the available chord types chord notes and scale notes E Note Transposition rule setting Set the transposition rule for using the transposition table see item 4 below when transposing There
272. t TT Tempol 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value Tempo Meta Event is a large data block 24 bit it is divided into 4 groups with 7 bits going into each of the Tempos 1 4 4 receives the remaining 3 bits 3 6 2 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE 3 6 2 1 UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE 3 6 2 1 1 MIDI MASTER VOLUME Recive only binary hexadecimal 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111110 Universal Realtime 01111111 ID of target Device 00001001 04 Sub ID 1 Device Control Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 Master Volume Osssssss SS Volume LSB Ottttttt Volume MSB 11110111 7 End of Exclusive or 11110000 FO Exclusive status 01111110 Universal Realtime Oxxxnnnn XN When N is received N 0 F whichever is received When N is transmitted N always 0 X don t care 00001001 04 Sub ID 1 Device Control Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 Master Volume Osssssss SS Volume LSB Ottttttt TT Volume MSB 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value the ss value is ignored 3 6 2 2 UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE 3 6 2 2 1 GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON binary hexadecimal 11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01111110 Universal Non Realtime 01111111 ID of target Device 00001001 09 Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 00000001 01 Sub ID 2 General MIDI On 11110111 F7 End of Exclus
273. t one of the corresponding record modes Pi iid A 5 ale i E e gd y VOICE IRING GROOVE amp DYNAMICS 4 CN STYLE A AELODY MELODY ACMP VOICE VOICE VOICE a 4 L R2 i R M SONG v icon will be lit on the display indicating that the Song mode is engaged and the User song number will be shown above the icon 2 Select the SONG Record Mode Press the SONG button to select the SONG record mode The SONG menu icon will light The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo indicating that the record ready Synchro Start mode is engaged The track bars for MELODY 1 4 and ACMP tracks will flash at the bottom of the display Record Ready Mode 3 If Necessary Select a User Song Number When you want to change the user song number selected in step two use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to change it as required Select the Track to be Recorded When recording a melody track Use the TRACK buttons to select a MELODY 1 4 track to record For example if you press the track button below the MELODY 1 track the MELODY 1 track bar will stop flashing and the track bars for the other tracks will go out This shows that you have selected the MELODY 1 track as the track for recording NOTE n Song Record Ready Mode the track numbers 9 13 for corresponding to t
274. ta into a disk file before doing the load opera tion While data is loading Now Loading is dis played never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off Not Enough Memory may appear on the dis play if a problem oc curs that prevents the data from being loaded the capacity of the PSR 730 630 RAM is exceeded something is wrong with the floppy disk or the data from the disk is cor rupted etc If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk in serted into the disk drive will be displayed at the top of the display and disk operations won t be possible Disk Operations Press the 4 YES Button Make sure that the disk you wish to copy from source disk is inserted in the disk drive then press the YES button Now Reading will appear on the display The contents of the disk will be copied to the PSR 730 630 and when reading is finished Insert Copy Disk will be displayed Insert the Destination Disk into the Floppy Drive Insert the destination disk for the copy operation into the disk drive Now Copying will appear on the display Eig FU ER CP ou Data will be copied from the PSR 730 630 to the destination disk and when copying is finished the display will return to the Disk Copy YES If the quantity of data is large it may be necessary for the data to be copied in parts In such a case
275. te black key s to the root of the chord When the AUTO AC COMPANIMENT split point and SPLIT VOICE split point are set to the same key the L voice and the automatically selected bass note will sound Auto Accompaniment Applying Groove amp Dynamics When you press the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS button the GROOVE amp DYNAM ICS icon will light and the Groove amp Dynamics effect will be applied to the accompaniment GROOVE amp WII DYNAMICS LILI VOICE R GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Arranging the Groove amp Dynamics Effect User Settings You can arrange any of the Groove amp Dynamics settings Beat Groove Template Measure Groove Template Dynamics Template Dynamics Rate Expand Rate or Boost Rate that have been preset for each accompaniment style and apply any kind of effect you want Use the MENU A and F buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular indicator next to GROOVE amp DYNAMICS on the left side of the display MENU y Select the Beat Groove Template Use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the BeatGroove function from within the GROOVE amp DYNAMICS menu The name of the currently selected Beat Groove Template will appear on the right of the top line of the display MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL GROOVE amp DYNAMICS SUB MENU Referring to the Beat Groove Template List below use the buttons or
276. tery disposal information Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end please observe all local state and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod ucts that contain lead batteries plastics etc If your dealer is unable to assist you please contact Yamaha directly NAME PLATE LOCATION The name plate is located on the bottom of the product The model number serial number power requirements etc are located on this plate You should record the model number serial number and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase Model Serial No Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92 BP FCC INFORMATION U S A IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly ap proved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow in structions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with
277. the YES button and the delete operation will begin While it is in progress Now Deleting will appear at the top of the display When the delete operation is finished the sub menu will return to Delete File YES NOTE e If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk in serted into the disk drive will be displayed at the top of the display and disk operations won t be possible When the floppy disk s write protect tab is set to ON see page 64 or the disk is a purposely copy protected disk the display shows Disk Write Pro tected indicating that the Delete File function is not possible While the file is being deleted Now Delet ing is displayed never eject the floppy disk or turn the power off Song Playback You can playback a wonderful variety of songs on the PSR 730 630 including the preset demo songs the songs on the included Sample Disk the User Songs you record on a floppy disk and the songs on commercially available XG GM song collection disks Except for the preset demo songs a floppy disk must be inserted in the disk drive to playback a song Song Playback Procedure 1 Select the Song Menu Press the SONG button to select the SONG menu the triangular indicator will appear next to SONG to the right of the display The name and number of the currently selected song will appear on the left of the top line
278. the Data Dial to select one of the 49 template types Auto Accompaniment Beat Groove Template List The templates in this list shift the timing of the accompaniments by beats These templates add lifelike effect to your accompaniments by converting a specific beat to another and slightly shifting the converted beat Name Indicates each template name No 1 Thru No 1 adds no effect as its name implies Targeted Beat Beats to be converted 8 Eighth note 12 Eighth note triplet 16 16th note 24 16th note triplet Converted Beat Converted results For example selecting one of the templates 12 17 16 as Targeted Beat and 8 as Converted Beat indicates every 16th note will be converted to eighth notes Swing Delays the timing of the converted beat There are six types A Min B C D E Max and off no effect No Name Targeted Converted Swing Name Targeted Converted Swing Beat Beat Beat Beat 1 Thru 8 off off 26 12 12t016A A 12 16A A 218 off A 8 off A 27 12 12t016A B 12 16A B 3 8 off B 8 off B 28 12 12t016A C 12 16A C 4 8 off C 8 off 29 12 12t016A D 12 16 D 5 8 off D 8 off D 30 12 12t016A E 12 16A E 6 8 off E 8 off E 31 12 12to16B off 12 16B off 7 16 off A 16 off A 32 12 12to16B A 12 16B A 8 16 off B 16 off B 33 12 12to16B B 12 16B B 9 16 off C 16 off C 34 12 12to16B 12 16 C 10 16 off D
279. the protect position tab open If you attempt to modify the disk when the write protect tab is set to ON position Disk Write Protected will appear on the display indicating that the operation is not possible QN Write protect tab ON locked write protected N Write protect tab OFF unlocked write enabled Disk Operations User Song Data User song data is saved directly to the disk without saving itin the PSR 730 630 itself It may not be possible to record the full 60 files to a disk de Y pending on the legnth Record P Floppy of the recorded files Direct save Disk User Song Playback Direct read Maximum of 60 files can be saved User Style User Pad Registration Memory Data The PSR 730 630 has User Style User Pad and Registration Memory functions installed The data recorded with these functions can also be saved individually or The maximum num gathered together to floppy disks and also the data files saved on disks can be loaded ber of files may vary individually or gathered together into the PSR 730 630 2 saved files page 68 User Style User Pad Save Save or load individually or gathered together Up to 43 type files page 68 can be recorded on a 2HD disk Up to 21 All type files can be recorded on a 2DD disk
280. the display appears next to DISK to the left of the display Use the SUB MENU A and W buttons so that Load To Disk YES appears on the display SUB MENU 3 Select the File to Load Press the YES button and Load File file select screen will appear on the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the file to load 4 Select the File Type Data Type to Load Press the SUB MENU W button and the sub menu File Type will be displayed S MT i i uu T MT Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type data type to load The file types that you can load at this point will depend on the types of files that were originally saved to this file File types that were saved File types that can be loaded All All Style Pad Regist Style Style Pad Pad Regist Regist Style Reg Style Regist Style Reg Pad Regist Pad Regist Pad Regist Style Pad Style Pad Style Pad If the DISK menu is selected when there is no floppy disk in serted into the disk drive will be displayed at the top of the display and disk operations won t be possible If the disk contains no file the display shows File Not Found in dicating that the Load function is not pos sible Disk Operations 5 Select the Data to Be Loaded If Necessary If the file type select
281. the function has been selected use the and buttons or data dial or number buttons where applicable to set the function as required MIDI DIGITAL EFFECT OVERALL 4 GROOVE amp DYNAMICS SUB MENU Overall Functions Touch Sensitivity This function sets the keyboard touch sensitivity The range is from 0 to 127 The higher the value the higher the sensitivity When the touch sensitivity value is set to 0 Off appears in the display and the same volume is produced no matter how hard you play the keys this setting can produce a more realistic effect with voices that normally do not have touch response e g organ and harpsichord Pitch Bend Range See page 54 Modulation Wheel See page 55 Master Tuning The Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR 730 630 over a 100 cent range from 100 to 100 in 1 cent increments Since 1 cent is 1 100th of a semitone the total tuning range is from a semitone below normal pitch to a semitone above normal pitch Scale Tuning Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from 64 to 63 cents in 1 cent increments 1 cent 1 100th of a semitone This makes it possible to produce subtle tuning variations or tune the instrument to totally different scales e g classic or Arabic scales First use the S TuneNote function to select the note to be
282. tion block 1 14860 7 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 8 3 Feedback Delay 1 0 1 1486 0ms variation block 1 14860 9 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 4 Feedback Delay 2 0 1 1486 0ms variation block 1 14860 0 1 742 9ms insertion block 1 7429 11 5 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 12 6 High Damp 0 1 1 0 1 10 13 7 14 8 15 9 16 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e CHORUS1 2 3 4 CELESTE1 2 3 4 chorus variation insertion block 11 No Parameter Value See Table Control 18 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz 2 0kHz 4 40 table 3 2 EO Denn el 1 PEQ cow Gain adios 22 6 3 Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 4 Delay Offset 0 127 0 127 table 2 16 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 5 ECHO variation insertion block ra oc eds d Ericus ap Parameter See Table Control 8 High Frequency 500Hz 16 0kHz 28 58 table 3 1 Lch Delay1 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 9 EQ High Gain 12 12dB 52 76 0 1 371 4ms insertion block 1 3714 10 Dry Wet D63 gt W D W D lt W63 1 127 e 2 Lch Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 3 Rch Delay1 0 1 743 0ms variation block 1 7430 11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz 10 0kHz variation block 14 54 table 3 0 1 371 4ms insertion block 1 3714 12 EQ Mid Gain 12 12dB variation block 52 76 4 Rch Feedback Level 63 63 1 127 13 EQ Mid Width 1 0 12
283. ttings XGMULTI EQ PARAMETER PSR 730 only Also the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the folowing MIDI reception modes is selected These modes can be selected on the panel see page 127 Remote The Note On Off messages received at the desig nated Remote receive channel are processed the same asthe notes normally played on the keyboard In this mode only the following channel messages will be recognized Note On Off Control Changes Bank Select R1 voice only Modulation Volume Expression Sustain Sostenute Soft Pedal All Notes Off Program Change R1 voice only Pitch Bend 3 Off The MIDI channel messages will not be received at the designated channel Bass The note on off messages received at the channel s set to Bass are recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment section The bass notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on off and split point settings on the PSR 730 630 panel Chord The note on off messages received at the channel s set to Chord are recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment section The chords to be detected depend on the fingering mode on the PSR 730 630 The chords will be detected regardless of the ac companiment on off and split point settings on the PSR 730 630 panel Though these messages will not output by playing the keyboard and changing the panel settings they may be included in the Song or Style data and o
284. tuned The range is from C to B C Cf D D E F Ff G 6 A Af B note Db 4 note H S ji fe fe fe LH Then use the S TuneValue function to tune the selected note as required NOTE j The normal tuning value 0 can be re called by simulta neously pressing the and buttons Minus values can be entered by using the number buttons while holding the button NOTE The scale tuning set tings are common to each octave on the keyboard The Accompaniment and Multi Pad sound is affected by Scale Tuning The normal tuning value 0 can be re called by simulta neously pressing the and buttons Minus values can be entered by using the number buttons while holding the button Overall Functions Song Transpose This function allows you to transpose only the song to be played back That means you can play along with your desired song Minus one function in the desired key NOTE without affecting your performance Metronome When turned the PSR 730 630 metronome will sound during AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT playback as well as SONG playback and recording Split Voice Split Point See page 21 Accompaniment Split Point See page 30 Fingering Mode See page 31 Voice Set The VOICE SET feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automati cally setting a range of important
285. ty of harmony notes to the R1 voice or to your playing in the right hand section as well as adding an tremolo or other effect NOTE For details about using Digital Effects Reverb Chorus DSP Multi Effect Digital Equalizer see page 143 Reverb If you press the REVERB button the REVERB icon will light up and the Reverb effect will be turned on After setting the Reverb type the effect will be applied to the R1 voice from the keyboard REVERB te Selecting a Reverb Type Select one of the 13 Reverb types Use the MENU A and V buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT MENU MD DIGITAL EFFECT 4 OVERALL y Y GROOVE amp DYNAMICS Then use the SUB MENU A and buttons to select Reverb The name of the currently selected Reverb type will appear on the right of the top line of the display Referring to the Reverb Type List on page 145 use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired Reverb effect from 1 13 SUB MENU Reverb Return Level The Rev Return Reverb Return Level parameter sets the amount of reverb effect returned from the reverb effect stage thus making it possible to adjust the degree of reverb effect applied to the overall sound Use the MENU A and W buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT
286. u SplitPoint is shown on the display pressing the key on the keyboard doesn t either produce notes or detect chords in the accompaniment sec tion but only desig nates the split point Auto Accompaniment The PSR 730 630 has 100 different accompaniment styles from every musical type that can be used to provide fully orchestrated or rhythm only accompaniment Just select one of the many styles available and play along What i is Auto Accompaniment With the Auto Accompaniment feature all you have to do is play the chords in your song and the accompaniment style that matches your music will automatically play along following the same chord progression Using Auto Accompaniment even a solo performer can enjoy playing with an entire band or orchestra backing them up When Auto Accompaniment is turned on wc D The specified left hand section of the keyboard becomes the Auto Accompa ET d chords al dinthi d The default setting for niment section and chords played in this section are automatically detecte the Auto Accompani and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style ment split point is 54 the Auto Accompani AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ment sections ex split point 54 tends to the left of key 54 To change the Auto Accompaniment split point see page 30 L auto accompaniment section P Using Auto Accompaniment 1 Sele
287. ulti effects can be set and recorded for R1 R2 L part s They can t be recorded for the track used as the Accompaniment and or Harmony part During playback only the latest setting will be effective if several types are used for the tracks in a song the latest setting priority EX Two Multi Effect types set in series for R1 1 Multi Effect is turned on and 10 measures are recorded for R1 on track 1 2 Recording is started for R1 on track 2 with Multi effect off and then it is turned on at the fifth measure When you play back the song recorded with the above conditions the first four measures will be played back with the Multi Effect applied only to track 1 and the remaining six measures from the fifth through the end with Multi Effect applied only to track 2 Song Recording Punch In Punch Out The data recorded on tracks for keyboard playing R1 R2 L can be re recorded in parts with the Punch In Punch Out feature Before re recording 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Recording start gt Recording stop Punch In Punch Out After Re recording 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 Previously Newly played data m Previously played played data data T In the Record Ready Mode page 88 for the track you will re record or in the Rehearsal Mode use the SUB MENU A and V buttons so that Punch In Off appears on the display Use the and buttons 1 0 n
288. umber buttons or the Data Dial to enter the measure number for using the Punch In feature 2 Use the SUB MENU V button so that Punch Out Off appears on the display Use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to enter the measure number for using the Punch Out feature Start and Stop Recording Start recording as usual Even though you start playing from the beginning only the data played within the Punch In Punch Out range will be re recorded Punch In Punch Out recording is available only when Multi record mode is en gaged When in the Quick record ready mode Punch In or Punch Out appears on the dis play and Punch In Punch Out recording is not accessible If you select the tracks set as the Ac companiment or Har mony Punch In or Punch Out appears on the dis play and Punch In Punch Out recording is not accessible NOTE You use Punch In Punch Out to re record multiple tracks at the same time Punch In Punch Out cannot be used for songs that have no data recorded in them Punch In will be shown on the display cw NOTE The Punch Out mea sure number cannot be set lower than the Punch In measure number Song Recording Quantize With the Quantize feature the timing of data recorded in a user songs can be adjusted T In the Record Ready Mode for the track you want to
289. urrent transpose value will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds whenever one of the TRANSPOSE buttons is pressed during this time the and buttons number buttons or data dial can also be used to set the transpose value the transpose value also appears continuously above TRANSPOSE in the display pe E TRANSPOSE PP o GM 19 npa TEMPO REPEAT p STYLE Lu ACMP SONG TRANSPOSE The transpose range is from 12 to 12 Each step corresponds to one semitone allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1 octave A setting of 0 produces the normal pitch NOTE The Transpose func tion cannot be applied when a drum kit is the selected voice page 19 Press the TRANS POSE V and A buttons simulta neously to instantly reset the transpose value to 0 The new TRANS POSE value will take effect from the next key played When the Transpose value is shown at the top of the display you can use the 1 0 number keys the buttons or the Data Dial to change it Registration Memory The PSR 730 630 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete control panel setups 32 banks 4 setups each that you can recall whenever needed e The PSR 730 630 s initial Registration Memory 1 4 settings when it shipped from the factory are the same p
290. us one Playback Just like starting regular song playback press the START STOP button to start and stop Minus one playback You can play the muted part yourself START STOP X Pressing one of the TRACK buttons corresponding to the muted parts during song playback turns on that track part again Song Playback Repeat Play This function allows you to specify any section of a Demo or Sample disk song for continuous repeat playback 1 Select the Repeat Parameter While the SONG menu is selected but no recording is in progress use the SUB MENU A and buttons to select the Repeat parameter in the display The MAIN AUTO FILL A and B button indicators will flash A y 4 MAIN 7 eA e 2 Start Playback Press the START STOP button to start song playback START STOP 3 Specify the Repeat A and B Points While the song is playing press the MAIN AUTO FILL A button at the beginning wr p of the section to be repeated the A button indicator will light continuously and the SA rebat A repeat icon will appear in the display then press the MAIN AUTO FILL B point is specified re peat playback will oc button at the end of the section to be repeated the B button indicator will light cur betweeh the continuously and the B repeat icon will appear in the display Repeat playback will point and the end of begin automatic
291. us1 5 Conventional chorus program with rich warm chorusing 18 21 Flanger1 4 Pronounced three phase modulation with a slight metallic sound 22 Symphonic Exceptionally rich amp deep chorusing 23 Phaser Pronounced metallic modulation with periodic phase change 24 28 Rotary Speaker 1 5 Rotary speaker simulation 29 30 Tremolo 1 2 Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation 31 Guitar Tremolo Simulated electric guitar tremolo 32 Auto Pan Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position left right front back 33 Auto Wah Repeating filter sweep wah effect 34 Delay L C R Three independent delays for the left right and center stereo positions 35 Delay L R Initial delay for each stereo channel and two separate feedback delays 36 Echo Stereo delay with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel 37 Cross Delay Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats bouncing between the left and right channels 38 Distortion Hard Hard edge distortion 39 Distortion Soft This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard 40 EQ Disco Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies 41 EQ Telephone Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate the sounds through telephone 42 Off No effect Whenthe effecttype marked with is selected Dry Wet section onthe display will show indicating that Dry Wet setting is disabled i Harmony Type
292. utput Specifications Keyboards 61 standard size keys C1 C6 with touch response Display Large multi function LCD display Setup Stand by ON Master Volume MIN MAX Control amp Number Buttons MENU VOICE STYLE SONG SUB MENU 1 0 YES NO Disk Drive Demo 15 Songs Voice PSR 730 200 Panel Voices 12 Drum Kits 480 XG Voices Polyphony 64 PSR 630 215 Panel Voices 12 Drum Kits 480 XG Voices Polyphony 32 Voice Set R1 R2 L Voices Revoice Voice Volume Octave Pan Reverb Depth Chorus Depth DSP Depth Split Voice Mode Dual Voice Mode Auto Accompaniment 100 Styles Auto Accompaniment ON OFF Accompaniment Track RHYTHM1 2 BASS CHORD1 2 PAD PHRASE1 2 Accompaniment Track Settings ON OFF Accompaniment Control SYNC START SYNC STOP START STOP INTRO MAIN A B AUTO FILL ENDING Beat Indicator Accompaniment Volume Revoice Voice Volume Pan Reverb Depth Chorus Depth Virtual Arranger Groove amp Dynamics Beat Groove Template 49 types Measure Groove Template 25 types Dynamics Template 17 types Dynamics Rate 0 100 Expand Rate 0 400 Boost Rate 0 400 One Touch Setting Overall Controls Fingering Mode SINGLE FINGER FINGERED 1 FINGERED 2 FULL KEYBOARD MULTI Tempo 32 280 Transpose Pitch Bend Range Modulation Touch
293. uttons to select osx 4 the Disk function so that the triangular indicator p P EILBABN in the display appears next to DISK to the left a REGIST MEMORY J of the display MENU Mi DIGITAL EFFECT NN Use the SUB MENU A and VF buttons so Y SROOVEEDYNAMIES that Save To Disk YES appears on the display SUB MENU 3 Select the File Type Press the YES button and the file type select screen File Type All will appear on the display Use the and buttons or the Data Dial to select the file type for the data you want to save Refer to the file type list below All Save all User Style 101 104 User Pad bank 37 40 and Registration Memory bank 01 32 data into one single file Style Save all User Style 101 104 data gathered together into one single file Pad Save all User Pad bank 37 40 data gathered together into one single file Regist Save all Registration Memory bank 01 32 data gathered together into one single file Style Reg Save all User Style 101 104 and Registration Memory bank 01 32 data gathered together into one single file Pad Regist Save all User Pad bank 37 40 and Registration Memory bank 01 32 data gathered together into one single file Style Pad Save all User Style 101 104 and User Pad bank 37 40 data gathered together into one single file After formatting the capacity
294. vel to 64 fixed at 64 If you press the HARMONY button the HARMONY icon will light up and the Harmony effect will be turned on After setting the Harmony type it will be applied to the R1 voice S 4248 Xy CHORUS DSP HARMONY The Harmonies except for the types 6 7 and 9 are applied to the R1 voice according to the chords detected in the Accompaniment section Selecting a Harmony Select one of the 16 Harmony types There are various harmony effects depending on the Harmony type with some adding a number of higher notes to the note of the pressed key and some adding a number of lower notes Use the MENU A V buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display next to DIGITAL EFFECT MENU y 5 Then use the SUB MENU A and F buttons to select Harmony name of the currently selected Harmony type will appear on the right of the top line of the display SUB MENU Y 3 Referring to the Harmony Type List on page 147 use the and buttons the 1 0 number buttons or Data Dial to select the desired Harmony effect from 1 16 Digital Effects NOTE Harmony can not be turned on when a drum kit is selected for the H1 voice Harmony can not be turned on when the Full Keyboard Auto accompa niment fingering mode is selected even if Auto Ac companiment is on Har mony will be automatically turned off if the Full Key board fingering m
295. way through the song press the START STOP button one more time START STOP Song Playback Song Volume Control The volume of song playback can be adjusted for the best balance in relation to notes from the keyboard While in Song Mode the icon is lit press the ACMP SONG VOLUME A and V buttons When either button is pressed the current song volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds The song volume is also shown on the display when in the Song Mode the icon is lit ACMP SONG VOLUME ni uc TRANSPOSE VOLUME REGISTRATION MEMORY Press the ACMP SONG VOLUME A or W buttons to button to decrease or increase the volume within a range of 0 127 Press briefly to single step or hold for continuous decrementing incrementing Play from a Specified Measure Press the SONG button to select the SONG menu the triangular indicator will appear next to SONG to the right of the display Use the SUB MENU A and V buttons to select the Measure parameter in the display The current measure number will appear to the right of Measure on the top line of the display the current measure number is also continuously displayed next to MEASURE in the display I MEASURE Use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to specify the measure from which to begin playback then press the START STOP button to start
296. when a user vig 4 MAIN ALOR style has already been se e INTRO ENDING lected that user style EI ERN number will be used for recording The following panel set ting changes will occur when the style record mode is engaged The measure number will be reset to 1 f the Metronome function is on page 116 the met ronome will sound at the current tempo The Synchro Stop function will be turned off Style Recording 4 If Necessary Select a User Style Number If the desired user style is not already selected use the and buttons 1 0 number buttons or the Data Dial to select it 5 Select a Section to Record Press the INTRO MAIN A B ENDING or FILL button to select a section for recording To select the INTRO section Press the INTRO button the INTRO lamp will light To select the MAIN A section Press the MAIN A button the MAIN A lamp will light To select the MAIN B section Press the MAIN B button the MAIN B lamp will light To select the ENDING section Press the ENDING button the ENDING lamp will light To select the FILL section Press the MAIN button twice the MAIN A B lamp will light For example press the INTRO button lighting the INTRO indicator The indicators for the other sections will go out This shows that the INTRO section has b
297. you record using a SONG any previously re corded material in the same track will be erased If the SONG memory becomes full while recording Disk FULL will appear on the display and recording will stop the Rehearsal Mode will be engaged stop Recording Song Recording Recording is carried out in 1 measure increments If you stop recording in the middle of a measure rests will automatically be recorded until the end of that measure If you start recording by pressing the START STOP button nothing will be recording on a MELODY track until you begin playing on the keyboard Only rhythm accompaniment will be recorded on the ACCOMPANIMENT track until you play a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn playback of previously recorded MELODY tracks or the AC COMPANIMENT track on or off as required Stop recording by pressing the START STOP button If you press the ENDING NOTE button while recording the ACCOMPANIMENT track recording will stop automati cally after the ending section has finished When recording is stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to 1 and the record ready mode will be engaged START STOP 7 Record Additional Tracks as Required By repeating steps 4 through 6 above you can select and record additional tracks as required Recording from the Middle of the Song Itis possibl

Yamaha DRX-730BL Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents